dd20-30 operating instructions.pdf

8/14/2019 DD20-30 Operating Instructions.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dd20-30-operating-instructionspdf 1/386

BTS

CAM1CAM1

PHILIPS

Diamond DigitalDD 20 / DD 30

Production Switcher

Operating Instructions



Before reading the entire manual, please check for any supplements at the end of the manual.

Item

Rev Date SerNo

Pages affected Contents Remarks

1 0 10.93 100 all Operating Instructions 1st Edition

2 1 01.95 from172 (DD30)190 (DD20)

all Software “I”,Application notesMontage Proc

2nd Edition

3 2 06.95 from172 (DD30)

190 (DD20)

Keyers panel 3rd Edition

4 3 11.97 all Software “L”Key Processor IIGeneral corrections

4th Edition

Diamond Digital DD 20 / DD 30

Philips Broadcast Television Systems

Revision Report

Documentation Order Number

Operating Instructions000 212 186 100



Contents Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

I

CONTENTSPage

1. General 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 General view of DD30 Control Panel 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 General view of DD20 Control Panel 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Functional Description Of The Panels 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Source Selection Panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Aux Buses Panel 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 Dve Panel 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 Notes for DVE Control 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Transition panel 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 Keyers 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.1 Keyer delegation 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.2 Hard key cut 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.3 Key modes 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.4 Key sources 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.5 Key adjustments 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.6 Automatic key adjustment 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.7 Keyer priority 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.8 Key masking 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.9 Key preview 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.10 Key inversion 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.11 Copying settings 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.12 Key Borderliner 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.13 Chroma keyers panel 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5.14 Automatic chroma key adjustment 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.15 Manual optimization of critical pictures 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.16 Manual adjustment of key color 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.17 Notes to the use of add and luminance key 41. . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 Operation of the Keyer Menus 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.1 Selection of the Keyer Menus 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.2 Selection of the keyer on DD10 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.3 Selection of the keyer on DD20 / DD30 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.4 Positioning sizing softening P/S/SO 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.5 Cleanup / Density / and Clip / Gain 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.6 Selectivity masking 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.7 Chroma key adjust menu 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.8 Forground Fade-Menu 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.9 Dynachrome-Menu 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 Downstream keyers Panel 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1 Downstream keyer transition 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8 Fade-to-black 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9 Mattes panel 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9.1 Limitation of the color triangle 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.10 Wipe panel 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.10.1 Wipe selection code for control panel andeditor operation 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.11 Masks panel 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.12 Positioner panel 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




II

2.13 Stores panel 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.14 Menu panel 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.15 Set up 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.16 Auto Delegation 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Menu control 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Short introduction to the menu symbols 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1 Control with graphic objects 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.2 Operational aid by running light in keys 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.3 Warning dialogue 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.4 Automatic analogue value indication in Menu 118. . . . . . . .

3.2 Menu overview 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Status menu 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.1 Indication of the mixing level status 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.2 Selection of submenus 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.3 Setting the layer modes 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.4 Setting the fader curve 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3.5 Setting the faders 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 Access menu 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.1 Selection of the electronics box 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.2 Entering new users and user access rights 129. . . . . . . . . .

3.4.3 Login of a user 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4 Entering and changing a password 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.5 Assignment of user access rights to theelectronics box 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6 Locking the control panel 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7 Leaving the access menu 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 Install menu 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.1 Setting the Screen Saver 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.2 Ident Input submenu 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.3 Couple submenu 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4 Configuration panel submenu 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4.1 User programmable keys 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.5 Configuration E-box submenu 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.6 Service submenu 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.7 Diagnosis submenu 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.7.1 Fader adjust 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.8 AUX panels submenu 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.9 GPI submenu 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.10 Submenu ext aux 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.10.1 General 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.10.2 Menu settings 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 DISK and File menus 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.1 Storing and recalling data with floppy disk 185. . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.2 General information on file menu 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.3 Directory structure of the switcher 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.4 Standard files in file menu 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.5 Contents of directory windows 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.6 Softkeys for menu control 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.7 Renaming files and devices 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.8 Making directories (mkdir) 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.9 Deleting and resetting files 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.10 Deleting and resetting directories 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




III

3.6.11 Copying files 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.12 Copying directories 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.13 Copying user-specific files 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.14 Loading backup files (Auto Load) 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.15 Error Messages 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 Transfer menu 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 Masks menu 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.1 Mask Delegation 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.2 Creating a box mask 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.3 Adjusting the mask position 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.4 Creating a wipe mask 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.5 Creating a mask from mask store 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.6 Selecting any other source as mask 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.7 Other setting options 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9 Stores menu 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.1 Selecting the mixing levels 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.2 Store delegation 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9.3 Field and frame mode 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.4 Freeze 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.5 Storing a video picture, video store(option: frame grabber) 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.6 Matte store (Option Texture store) 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.7 Maske store 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9.8 PaintModeMasking 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10 GPI-AC menu 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10.1 GPI input 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10.2 GPI output 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.11 BUS CORRECTION menu 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12 INPUT CORRECTION menu 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13 Montage-Processor (optional) 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.1 General 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.2 Main-menu 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.3 Matte-menu 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.4 Pixelmanipulator-menu 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.5 Montage processor 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.5.1 Store section 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.5.2 Source selection for MPR 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.5.3 Montage proccessor menu 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.5.4 Switcher setup for video 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13.5.5 Switcher setup for mpr-recursions (mpr-loop) 248. . .

3.13.5.6 Notes for the use of latch-mode 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14 Keyers menu 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. EXTRA 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 EXTRA panel 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 Display 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.2 Define Memo in extra-panel (DD20 / DD30 only) 260. . . . .

4.1.3 Relocating to a different mixing level(DD20 / DD30 only) 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.4 Enabling and disabling bank mode 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.5 Selecting a register during storing 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.6 Selecting a register during recalling 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.7 Storing a snapshot 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




IV

4.1.8 Generating a timeline 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.9 Components of a timeline 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10 Modifying a timeline in the EXTRA panel 270. . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.1 Changing the hold time 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.2 Changing the transition time 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.3 Changing the trajectory 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.4 Changing a keyframe 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.5 Inserting a new keyframe (INSert) 276. . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.6 Inserting a loop in a timeline 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.10.7 Deleting a keyframe 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.11 Recalling snapshot or timeline 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.12 Deleting snapshots and timelines 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Basic functions STORE, RECALL 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1 Using the extra menu 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1.1 Storing snapshots in menu 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1.2 Recalling snapshots in menu (DD10: data monitor required) 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1.3 Dissolve 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.2 Using the source selection keys (EXTRA ME operation,DD20 / DD30 only) 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.2.1 Recalling snapshots 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.2.2 Dissolve 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.3 Using the keys in the extra panel (DD20 / DD30 only) 292.

4.2.3.1 Storing snapshots 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.3.2 Recalling snapshots 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Basic functions EDIT, RECORD and PLAY 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.1 Creating a timeline with edit 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.2 Playing a timeline in menu 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.3 Recording a timeline in menu 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4 Basic functions PLAY, AUTO PLAY and FADER PLAY 299. . . . . . .

4.5 Other functions in the EXTRA menu 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.1 Delete 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.2 Assign 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.3 Rename (only available by the owner) 303. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.4 Define mode 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.5 Show memo 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 EXTRA editor 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.1 Modifying a timeline created with editin the EXTRA-panel 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.2 Creating a new timeline in menu 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.3 Overview of edit functions 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6.4 Overview of all graphic symbols 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.5 Notes and comments 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 Trajectory 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7.1 Tens (Tension) 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7.2 Bias 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7.3 Continuity 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7.4 Weight 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8 Error messages 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9 EXTRA-VTR-protokoll 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Application notes 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Loading flash software from DD floppy disk drive 351. . . . . . . . . . . .




V

5.2 Input assignments (on small panels) 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 Premises 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.1 Standard Button Row Indexing 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.2 Network Examples 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.3 Applications 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.4 What will be copied? 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.5 Status of Coupled Key Signals 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1.6 Reset a panel assignment to factory setup 356. . . . .

5.2.2 Copy panel assignments 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2.1 DD5 and DD10 without VGA(EGA)-Monitor(push file) 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2.2 DD5 and DD10 with VGA(EGA)-Monitor(get file) 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Simultaneous editor- and live-use 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 Operation goal 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.2 Network example 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.3 Standard situation 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.4 Technical background 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.5 Problem solution 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 External router integration 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.1 Overview 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.2 System examples 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.3 Possible interfaces 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.4 Router interface glossary 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 Downstream keying with dedicated fader 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.1 Application 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.2 Problem solution 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.3 Set up the timeline 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.4 Run the DSK-timeline 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6 Use of masking 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.1 Applications 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.2 Operation 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.3 General setup 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.4 Mask operations by use of display menues 370. . . . . . . . . .

5.6.5 Mask operations with buttons in panel modules 373. . . . . .

6. Index 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



1. General Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

3

1. GENERAL

The control panels of the Diamond digital DD20/DD30 switchers are designed inconventional layout based on mixing levels (ME). This classic layout with matrixselection on the left, followed by the transition control according to the next-transi-tion principle and key adjustments for each ME is a familiar sight for many users.

To facilitate orientation and distinction between individual functional groups, thevarious control groups are subdivided into panels which are optically and structur-ally separated. Functions that are assigned to only one ME have colored title barsand frames. Functions affecting more than one ME are identified with grey title barsand grey frames. Functionally related keys are identified with grey bars. For con-trols, functional lines indicate associated functions.

The many identical functions in the switchers required a multiple assignment of thecontrol panels. Depending on the importance of the functions, various methodswere applied here. Each ME has its own keyer control panel for two keyers each,

while all other functional groups only exist once for the entire switcher.

The controls have double functions only if these are related, e.g. chroma keyadjustments or matte adjustments.

The control panels include delegation keys which serve to assign the relevant con-trol elements to a particular switching component. These delegation keys canalways be found in the same place of the various panels, i.e. in the lower outer cor-ner of the panel as seen from the middle.

During the actual operation, the delegation of the panels is performed by an auto-matic delegation system which may automatically switch several functional panels.

The automatic delegation is started by selecting or preselecting a function.Renewed actuation of an already active key serves to repeat the automatic delega-tion.

The legibility of the keys can be adapted to the existing light conditions with anadjustable background lighting.

For all more complex functions such as editing timelines or setup functions, theswitchers are equipped with an EL display with softkeys and softpots.




5

1.2 GENERAL VIEW OF DD20 CONTROL PANEL

CAM1CAM1

CAM1CAM1

BTS

CAM1CAM1

Diamond digital

Disk drive Menu panel Wipe panel

Chroma Key panel

Positioner

Source Selection panel

Aux Buses panel

Transition panel ME1

Transition panel PP

Keyer ME1 panel

Keyer PP panel

Mattes panel

EXTRA panel

Fade-to-Black-panel

Option ME2 The Diamond digital DD20 production switcher includes the mixing levels ME1 and

PP as a standard. The control panel is designed accordingly. If the switcher elec-tronics is equipped with another mixing level ME2, the entire control level may bechanged over with the delegation keys ME1 and ME2 (below the Wipe panel).




6



2.1 Source selection Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

7

2. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTROL PANELS

2.1 SOURCE SELECTION PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers are equipped with 32 serialdigital inputs which can be universally used for video or key signals. In addition, thesignal of the internal video store, two background mattes and black as a signal areavailable.The 32 inputs are assigned permanently to the sequence of primary keys. Thebackground mattes and black may be assigned permanently to the sequence ofprimary keys.Key and Fill signals may be coupled in any combination (for further informationplease refer to Installation menu ).

Key Buses

Background 1

Background Preset

CAM1 CAM1 CAM1CAM2 CAM3 CAM4 VTR1 V TR2 VTR3 VTR4 CHG1 C HG2 S TI L S TI L EXT 1 EXT 2 EXT3 EXT4 DVE1 DVE2 CINE SDR1 SDR2 PROC NR COL1 COL2 MATT BLCK

Key Buses

Background 2

Background Preset


Key Buses

Program

54321 876 13121110 161514 2120191817 2423229

Preset


54321 876 13121110 161514 2120191817 2423229 BGD1BGD2 Black ME1 ME2 PP

BGD1BGD2 Black ME1 ME2

Extra 2nd

On Air

On Air

Key 2

Key 1

Extra 2nd

On Air

On Air

Key 2

Key 1

2nd

On Air

On Air

Key 2

Key 1

ME2

Key, Background1, Background Preset ME2 (not for DD20) buses

Key, Background1, Background Preset ME1 buses

Key, Programm, and Programm Preset busess

Aux Buses key bank

ME2

ME2

ME1

ME1

ME1

Key 2

Key 1

ME2

ME2

ME1

ME1

Key 2

Key 1

Key 2

Key 1




8

Background The Background bus key bank indicates which background picture is currently

selected. Pressing another key in this bank performs a hard cut to another back-ground picture. The selected background picture can be checked on the programmonitor.

Background Preset The Preset bus key bank serves for the preselection and indication of the back-ground picture involved in the next transition. The background picture and theselected modifications (e.g. key) can be previewed on the preset monitor.

Background and Preset bus operate in Flip-Flop mode, i.e. after completion of therunning transition, the preset and background sources will change automatically.Thus, the signal contributing to the output picture can be clearly identified.

The arrangement of the Background and Preset bus key banks can be changedfrom the international mode (Preset key bank below ) to German mode (Back-

ground bus bank below). For further information please refer to Installation menu .




9

Key Buses The Key Buses key bank serves for the selection and indication of key and fill

signals. This key bank is available for all keyers of the switcher. The orange indica-tions Key 1, Key 2 show the keyer to which the key bank is currently assigned.

The Key Buses key bank is assigned in the Keyers panel with Key 1, Key 2 or byselecting the keyer with the next-transition keys Key 1 or Key 2 in the Transitionpanel.

Cut Keyon

BGD BGDA B

Key Key1 2

For details on key control please refer to the sections Keyers Panel and Transi- tion Panel .

2nd Delegation The 2nd key permits the selection of further signals (e.g. video store) in additionto the 24 (DD20:18) directly selectable sources. The 2nd key will light when pres-sed. The current key assignment can be read from the respective key display(option).

If the optional Input Mnemonics is not available, we recommend an identificationwith text on camera tape.

On Air The buses involved in the output picture are indicated with a red On Air to the rightof the Program and Preset busses and a red Key 1; Key 2 next to the right of KeyBuses.

Asynchronous sources

Asynchronous picture signals are indicated by a flashing On Air.

Note: Asynchronous picture signals are instantaneously switched through by the switcher. An interference-free operation of the downstream units is not always ensured.See also REPL ASYNC in the CONFIG E BOX menu.




10



2.2 Aux Buses panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

12

2.2 AUX BUSES PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers provide a maximum of 11serial digital auxiliary outputs. Seven are designed for video or key signals and four

are envisaged for the integration of two DVEs, each with video and key signals.

54321 6 161514 2120191817 242322 BGD1 BGD2 Black ME1 ME2 PP

CAM1 CAM1 CAM1CAM2 CAM3 CAM4 VTR1 VTR2 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 DVE1 DVE2 CINE SDR1 SDR2 PROC NR COL1 COL2 MATT BLCK

DVE1

DVEAux5Aux1 Aux6Aux2 Aux3 Aux4

2

Delegation

ExtVideo Store PVWstore Aux

....

....

The Aux Buses key bank permits the selection of the following signals:

• all 32 serial picture signals, keys 1 ... 32• background mattes, keys BGD Matte 1 and BGD Matte 2 • picture signal black, key Black • picture signal from internal video store, keys Video store • the internal signals, keys PVW, Clean Feed and PGM• PGM, PST, Key1 and Key2 of ME1, ME2 and PP level (only for DVE1, DVE2)

The delegation keysAux1 .... Aux6

,DVE1

,DVE2

... serve to assign the current

status of the Aux Buses key bank to the respective Aux output.The other statuses are stored internally and are automatically restored whenanother Aux bus is selected.Program, Preset and Key buses and the Aux buses can be coupled in any combina-tion (for further details please refer to section Set-up ).

DVE When the DVE bus is selected, a key signal (e.g. caption generator) coupled with

a picture signal is automatically switched through via the DVE key output. If no keysignal is available, the DVE key output will be 100 % white (please refer also to sec-tion DVE Panel ).If no coupling has been established between video and key or if you wish to select

a key signal other than the coupled key, please proceed as follows:• Delegate to DVE bus with DVE1 or DVE2.• Select a video signal with a bus key.• Select a key signal with the DVE key held down.

Video store Pressing Video store assigns the control function of the Aux bus key bank to the

internal video store. Except for the stored picture itself, all signals can be selected.

For further information please refer to section Stores Panel .



2.2 Aux Buses panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

13



2.3 DVE panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

2

2.3 DVE PANEL

In DVE mode, the following signals can be switched to an external DVE:

• all signals of the Aux Buses. If a coupled key signal is available, it will be sent to

the DVE as key signal.• video signals and – if available – the associated key signal from the respective

mixing level.If only video and no key signal is available, the key signal sent to DVE is 100%white.

Key 2

To DVE only

Loop

Mode

Key 1PresetPGM ME 1 ME 2 PP

If Loop is not enabled, the respective video as well as the key signal, if any, isswitched to the DVE.The manipulated signals of the DVE are available on the input matrix and can beprocessed in the same way as normal video signals.

If Loop is actuated, the respective video and key signal is switched to the DVE. The

manipulated signals of the DVE are fed back into the ME to the point where alsothe unmanipulated signals arrive.

To assign DVE1 or DVE2 to ME1, ME2 or PP, simultaneously press the DVE keyin the Transition Type selection field of the desired ME and the bus delegation keyDVE1 or DVE2.

The PGM and Preset keys serve to determine in a background DVE transition inthe Transition panel whether the new picture will come with the DVE ( Preset) orthe old picture will disappear with the DVE (PGM).If in the Transition panel the DVE transition is enabled, the functions in the DVEpanel are enabled automatically without any delegation.

Note: For the DVE integration the following must be set in the Setup • Inputs for video and key signals (enables the function of the Loop

key)

• Port assignment for DVE control (enables the function of the DVE Transition Type key)




3

2.3.1 NOTES FOR DVE CONTROL

Connection

Operating modes DVE devices that are linked to the Diamond digital switchers in terms of signals and

control can be used in various modes.

1. FX Loop

In this mode, the video and key signals to the DVE device are switched automat-ically and the sequences of the DVE device are controlled with the fader in theTransition panel. The DVE device permits transitions of the background and ofkeyers that are controlled in the same way as wipe transitions.In this mode, Loop and DVE transition are enabled.

2. FX Loop without fader

In this mode, the video and key signals to the DVE device are switched manu-

ally. The control of the sequences is made with the DVE digipot in the Wipepanel, which in this mode is switched over to DVE operation.This mode permits integrating particularly static DVE effects into a picture, e.g.smaller pictures at a fixed position.In this mode, Loop is enabled and DVE transition is disabled.

3. DVE effects without FX Loop

In this mode, all signals applied to the switcher as well as the internal signalsfrom the key levels may be selected as DVE input signals. The DVE sequencecontrol is made with the DVE digipot in the Wipe panel, which in this mode isswitched over to DVE operation. The DVE effect is faded-in at any key level ofthe switcher.

In this mode, Loop and DVE transition are disabled.

4. In modes 2 and 3, the DVE device may also be directly controlled by an externaleditor instead of the digipot. For this no control link exists between switcher andDVE.

Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á















Assignment forDD20 and DD30

Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á















Required for mode 1 only.

As two DVE devices may be connected to the switchers, the DVE(s) must beassigned to the switching levels MEx/PP. One DVE may be assigned to severalMEs.If only one DVE is connected, this must be assigned as well. It may be assigned to

any ME and the PP stage. Any assignment will remain stored until the assignmentis changed. Before the assignment, a port for the DVE must be defined by portnumber and port protocol in the Setup.

Assignment is made as follows:

• Hold down the DVE transition key in the Transition panel of the respective MEand

• Press DVE1 or DVE2 of the Aux bus delegation to assign the DVE device tothe respective ME.

Note: Each DVE (DVE1 or DVE2) may only be selected as type of transition in one ME for one picture component.




5

Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á






Mode 2 FX Loop without fader

Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á Á






Select theDVE key (DVE1 or DVE2 in case of DD20; DD30 ) on the Aux bus delega-tion bank.Disable DVE transition in the Transition panel (if enabled).Select the picture component to be switched to the DVE (Key 1, Key 2).

Enable Loop, i.e. switch DVE into the video path.

Note: For DD20, DD30: In exceptional operating states the keys in the ”to DVE only” field may fail to respond. For the selection of a picture component, one of the keys ME1, ME2 or PP must be held down.

The DVE digipot in the Wipe panel permits running the DVE effect. As it is difficultto achieve a continuous sequence with the digipot, this operation can only berecommended for a static DVE positioning. A uniform movement can, however, berealized with an EXTRA timeline. The picture component manipulated with theDVE can be faded with Wipe or Mix in the Transition panel.

Note: Function Loop ON DVE in video path for the picture componentFunction Loop OFF DVE not in video path for the picture component









Mode 3 DVE effects without FX Loop









Select theDVE key (DVE1 or DVE2 in case of DD20; DD30 ) on the Aux bus delega-tion bank.

Disable Loop.

Disable DVE transition in the Transition panel (if enabled).

In this mode, the following signals can be switched to the DVE:

• all signals of the Aux bus; if a coupled key signal exists, this is sent to the DVE

as key signal.

• video signals and – if existing – the pertaining key signal from the respective

switching level.

If only a video signal and no key signal exists, 100 % white is sent to the DVE askey signal.

If the DVE delegation key is held down, any signal may be selected as key signal.



2.4 Transition panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

6

2.4 TRANSITION PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers include a universal mixinglevel with background transition stage and two independent upstream-keyers.

With both keyers, Luminance and Linear Key mode can be enabled. The newDynaChrome (option) provides a brilliant Chroma Key.

The transition panels for the ME1, ME2 (DD30) and PP levels are set up identically.For an ergonomic layout, the fader for the ME2 level is arranged on the left-handside of the panel.

BGDLimit

BLK Trans

1 2

WP 1 MIX WP 2

1 2 3 4

Transition

On On

Over Over

Transition Type

Add DVE MixWipe

1Wipe

2

Key Key

Limit

TransTrans

set

On

1 2

Pst PVWdur

WP 1 MIX WP 2

1 2 3 4

On On

Over Over

Transition type

Add DVE MixWipe

1Wipe

2

BGD

WP 1WP 1

On On

Auto Cut

For picture design, Add, Mix, DVE and Wipe transition can be selected with up totwo wipe generators available. The individual picture components can be simulta-neously faded with different transition types.Control of the mixing level is facilitated by the consistent application of the next-transition principle.

For an optimum preview of the picture design, the switcher can be equipped withindependent preview mixing levels as an option.




7

Next Transition The next-transition keys BGD, BGD, Key 1 and Key 2 permit the preselection ofthe picture components to be involved in the next transition. The keys are mutuallyexclusive. If you wish to fade several picture components simultaneously, press therespective keys at the same time.

BGDKey Key

1 2

WP 1 MIX WP 2

BGD

WP 1

The selected keys light up and indicate which picture components will be affectedduring the next transition. The result can be checked on the preview monitor.The display above the keys show the type of transition (WP1 for Wipe1, WP2 forWipe2, MIX, DVE, ADD) that was selected for the respective picture component.

The current status of a keyer is indicated with On below the next-transition keys.

Keyer priority The priority among the keyers is indicated with OverIf, for instance, Over is on below Key 1, keyer 1 has priority over keyer 2.Key Over in the Keyers panel enables the user to change the priority of the keyers.

Key 2Key 1

BGD

Key Key

1 2

On On

Over Over

Background

BGD




8

Transition Type The Transition Type panel permits selection of different types of transition:To select a transition type, activate the next-transition key for the picture compo-nent and then select a transition type with Add, DVE, Mix, Wipe 1 or Wipe 2.

Transition Type

Add DVE MixWipe

1Wipe

2

The selected transition type is indicated above the respective next-transition key.

Note: Please note that you can only change the transition type when the transition procedure is finished, i.e. when an automatic transition has been completed or the fader is in final position.

Add Add permits the addition of the two background signals for a transition. In mid posi-tion of the fader, both signals are faded in at 100%. The output level is internallylimited to approx. 108%.

Note: Please note that this type of transition can only be used for background transitions.

DVE DVE permits recalling and running DVE effects from the switcher in the same wayas wipe effects.The various effects must be programmed on the respective DVE before and can

then be recalled with the wipe pattern selection keypad in the Wipe panel when theassociated display shows DVE.For further information and important notes on DVE control please refer to the sec-tion DVE Panel .To assign DVE1 or DVE2 to the relevant ME, simultaneously press the DVE keyand the DVE1 or DVE2 delegation key.

Note: Please note that the DVE transition type can only be effective for one picture component.

Mix Mix enables a type of transition which performs a cross fading between the picture

signals selected with the next-transition keys.




12

Trans PVW Trans PVW permits an optional preview of the transition on the preview monitorwithout affecting the output picture.Trans PVW will light up when activated. All current settings are stored and are auto-matically restored when you leave the Transition PVW mode.It is now possible to select other transition types, to deselect picture components

and to execute the transitions with Cut or Auto or manually with the fader.

Note: Please note that the Trans PVW mode can only be enabled or disabled when the transition is finished, i.e. when an automatic transition has been completed or the fader is in final position.

If another background picture is to be transmitted to the output while Trans PVWis enabled, this can be made by direct selection on the bus which is identified byOn Air. This will result in a hard cut to another background picture.

At end of transitionwith TRANS PREVIEW on, the PGM and PST Bus do not longerswitch.

Operation of TRANS PVW can be modified in menu CONFIG. PANEL. New settingTRW-PVW

“Mode 1” = compatible operation.TRANS PVW stays on and shows in endposition the final image onthe PVW output.

“Mode 2” = TRANS PVW goes automatically to the begin of the transition whenreaching the endposition.Does not apply with LIMIT ON.

“Mode 3” = “One shot mode”.TRANS PVW switches automatically off, when T-Bar goes to eitherendposition.Note: Also when returning to the begin TRANS PVW is switched off.Does not apply with LIMIT ON.

Note: Mode 2 and 3 behave as described when using the T-Bar for controlling the transition. AUTO transition behaves as before equivalent to Mode 1.

Limit set, Limit on The Limit set and Limit on keys serve to create reproducible partial transitions.This mode is possible with all types of transition.Limit set permits storing the desired value set with the fader.Limit on enables the mode. Any transition with Cut or Auto and any manual transi-tion with the fader is only executed up to the value previously defined with Limit set.

If the transition is made with the fader, the yellow arrow to the left of the fader doesnot change the direction when the fader is moved to a final position, thus indicating

that the transition is not completed.If Limit on is switched off at the point defined by Limit set, a jerk free transition tothe next contribution can be made with the fader. The remaining fader path is thenstretched to the full fader path.




13



2.5 Keyers Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

14

2.5 KEYERS

Key

Matte Key

Bord

Key

Shdw

Mask

Key

Drop

Mask

Pattn

Out

PVW

Coupl

Pattn

CutBGD BGD

over

A B

inv

Bus

on Key

Bus

1

line

Split

2

Keyers

Position Opacity

Opacity

Gain / Size Clip

Border

Fill Source

Key1

KeyBus

Key2

Source

Auto

ShdwStore

KeyOn

Key

Density Clean up

SplitKey

AddLum

Lin –– –– Lin

Type

ChrKey

Keyers panel

Chr

ME 1

Key

DSK

ME 1

DSK

Key 1 Key 2

1 2

Chroma Keyers

Selectivity L

ME 1 ME 1Key 1 Key 2

Selectivity R

Luminance

Hue

Cursor

Auto

Color FGDFade

Chroma Keyers panel

Chroma




15

2.5.1 KEYER DELEGATION

The delegation keys Key 1 and Key 2 serve to delegate the Keyers panel toanother keyer if you want to change the keyer proposed by the automatic delega-tion system. With keyer delegation also the key bus is delegated.

The delegation keys BGDA and BGDB serve to activate several operational ele-ments of the Keyers panel in LAYERED mode.In ME operation these keys are not assigned.

If the function Auto Menu is activated, the delegation keys switched on the keyersmenu when the key types Add, Lum, ChrKey are selected.

Cut Key

on

BGD BGDA B

Key Key1 2

2.5.2 HARD KEY CUT

The Cut key serves to execute the transition as a hard cut. If the keyer is enabled,this will be indicated by Key on.




16

2.5.3 KEY MODES

Pattn Pattn1 2

Source

Mask

Key

Add Lum


Type

ChrKey

Note The Add Lin and Lum Lin keys enable selecting three operational modes (see below).

The keys are lit as follows:

Key function Add/Lin (Lin Key) Lum/Lin (Lum Key)

additive key YES NO

multiplicative keygain = unity

YES YES

multiplicative keygain <> unity

NO YES

Add Key Add Key serves to select the Additiv Key mode. In this mode, an external unit (e.g.DVE, modern caption generators, paint systems) generates and supplies the keysignal and the associated fill signal.The background signal is multiplied with the key control signal and added to thesupplied fill signal. This mode ensures that the supplied fill signal is not influencedand that all details contained in it are reproduced true to the original.

Note: Please note that the supplied fill signal must be based on a black background. Otherwise the addition of the signals will yield a discol-

ored background signal.




17

Lum Key Lum Key selects the luminance key mode. The key control signal is derived fromthe luminance component of the key source signal. The key control signal controlsthe transition between background signal and fill signal.

Luminance Key is available in the modes equalized (eq) and non-equalized (neq).

Lum Key eq Is automatically switched on in the Self Key mode(key fill signal corresponds to the key source signal).Thus, dark halo effects at edges and soft transitions areavoided.

Lum Key Is automatically switched on when Fill and Source do nothave the same source (Non Self Key).

Note: Please note that P/S/S = ON forcibly switched off Lum Key eq.

Lin Key Pressing the two keys (Add) Lin and (Lum) Lin sets the luminance key into a linearmode. The key control signal corresponds to the non- amplified and unlimited lumi-nance signal.

Chr Key Chr Key serves to select the Chroma Key mode. In this mode, the key control signalis derived from the chrominance component of the key source signal. Any colormay be keyed.

The DynaChromeKey mode ensures that all details in the fill signal, such assmoke, shadow, or glass, are preserved true to the original. In this mode, the keyfill signal is subtractively and proportionately deprived by the key color in the key

area. The background signal is multiplied with the key control signal and added tothe “cleaned” fill signal.

Note: Please note that P/S/S = ON forcibly switches over to FGD-Fade.

FGD Fade When the Foreground Fade function is enabled, the key in control signal serves tofade between the background signal and the “cleaned” key fill signal.

Note: Please note that DynaChrome can only be used without Foreground Fade for Self Key (identical fill and source signal). If you are not working with Self Key or in case of a border, Foreground Fade will automatically be switched on without special indication.




18

Pattn 1, Pattn 2 Pattn 1 or Pattn 2 serves to select the wipe pattern generator as a key source (pat-tern key). The pattern can be selected with the wipe pattern selection keys in theWipe panel. The size of the pattern can be adjusted with the Size control in the Key-ers panel or the Wipe panel.The pattern can be positioned with the trackball in the Positioner panel. For this pur-

pose, press Pos on the Wipe panel.

Note: Please note that the wipe generators can be used simultaneously for several applications which may interact with one another.

Mask Key Mask Key serves to select the mask chosen in the Masks panel as a key signal.For further information please refer to sections Mask Panel , Wipe Panel and

Stores Panel .

Note: If the function KEY MEMORY is activated (menu CONFIG EBOX) the operation modes Mask key and Pattern key can be switched off by a renewed pressing of the corresponding key.Then the mixer take up the status (see Key Memory) of the last stored “ natural ” key ( Add , Lin , Lum or Chroma key ) with all settings.If the operation modes Mask key and Pattern key are switched off by a direct selection of the key modes Add , Lin , Lum or Chroma key , the former settings are only available partly.




20

2.5.5 KEY ADJUSTMENTS

Key

Matte Key

Bord

Key

Shdw

Mask

Key

Drop

Mask

Pattn

Out

PVW

Coupl

Pattn

CutBGD BGD

over

A B

inv

Bus

on Key

Bus

1

line

Split

2

Keyers

Position Opacity

Opacity

Gain / Size Clip

Border

Fill Source

Key1

KeyBus

Key2

Source

Auto

ShdwStore

KeyOn

Key

Density Clean up

Add Lum


Type

ChrKey

SplitKey

Please refer to Key Borders .

The Opacity control permits adjusting the transparency of the key fade-in.

The Add, Luminance or Chroma Key modes enable to optionally adjust the steep-ness (gain) of the key control signal or the density of the foreground signal. Selec-tion is made in the Key menu.

The Add, Luminance or Chroma Key modes enable to optionally adjust the clippingpoint of the key control signal or the cleanness of the background (noise, undesiredshadows, uncleanness).

Border position,

Opacity

Opacity

Gain/Size Density

Clip Clean up




21

2.5.6 AUTOMATIC KEY ADJUSTMENT

The Auto key serves to start various automatic functions in the different keymodes.

In Add Key, the key control is switched to 1:1 transfer so that key signals e.g. fromthe caption generator are effective without change.

In Luminance Key, clip and gain are set so that the key signal is only just visible.

In Chroma Key, the key has the same function as the Auto key in the Chroma Keypanel (please refer to Chroma Key Panel ).

Note: After all automatic key adjustments, the corresponding parameters may still be changed manually.

2.5.7 KEYER PRIORITY

Key Over serves to change the priority among the keyers. The keyer priority is indi-cated in the Transition panel with Over below the next-transition keys Key 1 andKey 2.If, for instance, Over lights up below Key 1, Keyer 1 is placed over Keyer 2.

2.5.8 KEY MASKING

The mask selected in the Masks panel can be switched on with the Mask on key.

For further information please refer to the sections Masks Panel and Stores Panel .

2.5.9 KEY PREVIEW

Key PVW serves to display the keying result or the key signal on the preview moni-tor to permit optimization.This function permits adjusting a keyer which is not selected in the Transition panel.




22

2.5.10 KEY INVERSION

If you press Key inv the key signal is inverted, i.e. the contents of foreground andbackground are exchanged on the screen.

If you press Key PVW repeatedly, the following signals can successively beswitched to the preview monitor:

• original key fill signal on current background picture

• key control signal as black-and-white signal.

2.5.11 COPYING KEY SETTINGS

The settings of a keyer can easily be copied and assigned to the other keyers. It

is also possible to exchange the setting of keyers.

For further information please refer to section 4.7 Transfer Menu.




23

2.5.12 KEY BORDERLINER

Shdw Drop Outline

Position OpacityBorder

BordShdwStore

The Border key group enables the user to provide the key signals with a bordereffect which can be adjusted individually.

Shdw Store Shdw Store serves to produce a shadow that can be positioned over the entire pic-ture (optional). The shadow is generated by the shadow store and can be posi-

tioned with the trackball.

Note: If the shadow is positioned before or above the original, the shadow is delayed by one frame.

Bord The Bord key serves to generate a simple border rule. Each time the key ispressed, the width of the border rule changes (number of picture lines: H and 2H).After the third actuation of the key, the function is disabled again.

Shadow The Shdw key serves to produce a shadow at the right and bottom edges of thekey fade-in. Each time you press the key, the width of the shadow changes (numberof picture lines: H, 2H, 3H and 4H). After the fifth actuation of the key, the functionis disabled again.

Drop The Drop key serves to produce a drop shadow at the right and bottom edge of thekey fade-in. Each time you press the key, the width of the shadow changes (numberof picture lines: H, 2H, 3H and 4H). After the fifth actuation of the key. the functionis disabled again.

Outline If Outline is pressed, only the outline of the key fade-in is faded in. The outline sig-nal is filled with the background signal. Each time you press the key, the width ofthe outline changes (number of picture lines: H and 2H). After the third actuationof the key, the function is disabled again.

Position The Position control permits changing the position of the border in steps.

Note: Please note that the position of the original signal changes when you position a shadow above or before the border signal.

Opacity The Opacity control serves to change the transparency of the border.




24

Border off

Border

Shadow

Drop

Outline

Key

Background




25

2.5.13 CHROMA KEYERS PANEL

ME 1

DSK

ME 1

DSK

Key 1 Key 2

1 2

Chroma Keyers

Selectivity L

ME 1 ME 1Key 1 Key 2

Selectivity R

Luminance

Hue

Chroma

Cursor

Auto

KeyColor

FGDFade

ME1 ME1 The delegation keys permit delegating the Chroma Keyers panel to another keyerKey1 Key2 if you want to change the keyer proposed by the automatic delegation system.

ME2 ME2 Key1 Key2

DSK1 DSK2

Press Chr Key in the Keyers panel to select Chroma Key mode. In DynaChromeKey mode, the foreground signal is proportionally and subtractively deprived by thekey color in the key color area and colored neighbouring areas. The result is acleaned key fill signal which now contains in key color areas shadow-free black and

in neigh-bouring areas the de-mixed foreground colors.The key control signal is also derived from the foreground signal. The key controlsignal is multiplied with the background signal. The cleaned key fill signal and themultiplied background signal are added. This method ensures that all details arereproduced true to the original in the area of the key color.

Chr Key in Keyers panel




26

FGD Fade The FGD Fade (foreground fade) key switches over the chroma key procedure.Now, the cleaned key fill signal and the background signal are faded in one fadingoperation by the key control signal.In the area of the key color, only chrominance is subtractively removed, luminanceis retained. However, this will impair some advantages of the DynaChrom proce-

dure (good reproduction of details and transparency).

For optimal adaptation of cross fadings on edges or for optimization in case oftransparencies between foreground and background, the luminance value can beadjusted in the area of the key color.Adjustment is made with the Luminance control. During adjustment, Key colorhas to be held down.

This mode is recommendable when object edges will show unnatural, extremebrightenings in details and transparency areas in case of too intense CLEAN-UPadjustment, or extreme darkenings in case of too intense DENSITY adjustment.

For optimal adaptation of fade transitions at edges or for optimization in case oftransparencies between foreground and background, the luminance value can beadjusted in the area of the key color transitions. Adjustment is made with the func-tion LUMOFS (Luminance Offset). During adjustment, the Key Color key has tobe held down and the Luminance control be operated.

This mode may also be selected for improving the clean-up effect. It is required foreliminating noise and shadows and for adapting original background to key-in-fluenced background with DVE.

Note: Please note that Foreground Fade is enabled automatically - without special indication - in the following modes:

• Chroma Key Invert

• Chroma Key with Border

• not Self Key.

Before adjusting Chroma Key, you should try to create optimum conditionson the picture source side to ensure low interference, for example by anevenly lit blue wall of maximum size and little camera post-amplification.




27

2.5.14 AUTOMATIC CHROMA KEY ADJUSTMENT

This mode serves to adjust the following parameters:

• key color for LUMINANCE, HUE and CHROMA• selectivity for SELECTIVITY LEFT and SELECTIVITY RIGHT

The parameters DENSITY, CLEAN UP and SELECTIVITY-CENT are set by defaultby the adjustment to max. ccw position (ineffective).SELECTIVITY is set to center position (i.e. ineffective).COLOR CAN and NOISE REDuction to ON, P/S/S and SEL MASK to OFF.

Auto Pressing the Auto key starts an automatic key adjustment to Blue.The picture evaluation includes all those colors which are within an angle range of+/ – 30o around the primary color Blue. Within this range, blue with the highest inten-sity is detected as key color. Key color and selectivity are thus adjusted.

Cursor Pressing the Cursor key starts an automatic, cursor – assisted key adjustment.When you press the key, the key fill signal with key color and a cursor appears onthe preview monitor. Move the cursor to a spot of the key color using the trackballin the Positioner panel.Then press the Auto key to start the adjustment. Only those colors will be eva-luated the color angle of which resembles to that which was found within the cursor.With the condition of this color angle the complete picture is evaluated and the colorwith the highest intensity is detected as a key color.

Note: The Auto keys in the Chroma Keyer and the Keyers panels operate in

parallel.When the Keyer is on, the output signal will be affected during the automatic adjustment.

2.5.15 MANUAL OPTIMIZATION OF CRITICAL PICTURES

Selectivity Selectivity L (left), Selectivity R (right) and Selectivity Y enables the user tochange the selectivity manually.

This may be required for the following reasons:

• The user wants another compromise between color fringe and density of theforeground object.

• Size and focus of the foreground object were not sufficient.

• Blue spill has to be removed from the foreground object.

• The picture only contained the key color and no foreground object.

The selectivity separates the unchanged colors from those without key color com-ponent. The attributes Left and Right refer to the neighborhood to the key color inthe chromatic circle. Y refers to the luminance dependence of the gray mixed color.




28

Thus, the key color Blue influences the following colors:

• by Selectivity L, the reddish neighboring colors

• by Selectivity R, the greenish neighboring colors

• by Selectivity Y, the gray/yellow colors.

Direction of rotation of the controls:

The influence of the foreground is increased when Selectivity L is turned left andSelectivity R is turned right.When Selectivity L is at the right stop and Selectivity R is at the left stop, a veryhigh selectivity (i. e. narrow band color selection) is set.

With Selectivity Y = 50% (center position after automatic run), this parameter iswithout influence on the picture. Higher values (cw rotating) deprive gray edges in-creasingly by the key color, thus coloring them complementarily. A gray halo in yel-

low (blond) hair becomes yellow (blond) again when its gray was effected by mixingyellow and blue key colors.Adjustment of the selectivity should be just so much that the key color portion onthe foreground object has disappeared. Doing so, a slight ”keying” of the fore-ground object may be first put up with.

Selectivity C (Key Color key + Density knob)Selectivity center refers to the achromatic center of the color circle and acts on theslightly saturated key colors which cannot be influenced with SEL_R.

Problem: The light blue shirt of a newscaster is slightly transparent after adjustment. It could be made dense with DENSITY; however it wouldlose its blue color.

Solution: Rotate Selectivity C in cw direction until the shirt is dense.Then correct possibly obtained blue fringes with SEL– L and SEL– R.

Alternative: For reducing newly occurring blue fringes, first use DENSITY and then Selectivity C as described above.

The Density control can be used to restore the density of the foreground object.This may become necessary if the foreground object is slightly ”keyed” (trans-

parent) as a result of blue spill and/or the required selectivity setting.

The Clean up control can be used to ”clean up” the background.This may become necessary if the background contains noise or undesired shad-ows etc.

Density

Clean up




29

2.5.16 MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE KEY COLOR

Key Color Press and hold Key Color to permit a manual adjustment of the key color, i. e.access to the parameters of luminance, hue and chroma.

The following conditions must be given:

• FGD Fade ”OFF”

• Key ”ON” on background Black

• Density, Clean up and Selectivity C at left stop

• Selectivity L at right stop

• Selectivity R at left stop

• Luminance at left stop

• Chrominance at left right stop

The adjustment is made in the following order:

Hue Turn the Hue control until the key color is extensively achromatic. Then turn backSelectivity roughly until approximately all key colors are covered.

Chroma Turn the Chroma control until also the brightest color is remains only just achro-matic.

Luminance Turn the Lumincance control until the key color is only just black.

This setting can subsequently be optimized with the Selectivity, Density andClean up controls.




31

When should Luminance Key be used?

Luminance Key has always to be used when the key fill signal is not available ona black background. A further application for Luminance Key is in the Coupled/SplitKey mode when the key signal does not match with the fill signal with regard tocontour (e.g. DVE key signals with soft border).A so-called ”linear luminance key” (Lin Key) can be selected by simultaneously ac-tuating the keys Add/Lin and Lum/Lin, thus achieving that the maximally possibleluminance value range is completely and ”linearly” reproduced on key signal valuerange, regardless whether these extreme values also occur in the picture.Actuating the Auto key achieves that the momentarily darkest luminance value isreproduced on KEY=0 and the momentarily brightest value on KEY=1. Deviatingfrom that, the found adjustment can at any time be manually optimized by Clip/Gain or Clean up/Density.

The new key processor II overcomes the traditional disadvantage of the LuminanceKey that in the Self Key mode, square-distorted edge shapes or erroneously eva-

luated levels are obtained. Now, a fill signal is generated which has been complete-ly equalized. Thus is ensured that no dark edges are obtained at bright objects. Un-proportional darkenings with plane luminance intermediates are not obtainedneither.

When, however, by adjustment of Clip and Density, deviating from adjustment ofLin and Auto, a relatively dark luminance level is declared to be the foregroundlevel, this will of course also be reproduced, with the effect of fresh dark edges.



2.6 Operation of the keyers menus Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

32

2.6 OPERATION OF THE KEYER MENUS

2.6.1 SELECTION OF THE KEYER MENUS

The menus of the keyer are selected from the Status menu of the respective mixer.If the Auto Menu function is activated in the Installation menu of the control panel,pressing a key in the Keyers panel also switches to the associated keyer menu.

Status menu Diamond digital DD10

Status menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30




33

2.6.2 SELECTION OF THE KEYER ON DD10

For selecting the different keyers, the menu provides a cursor – sensitive switcharea. Touching this switch area cyclically calls the next keyer in the menu. If theAuto Menu function is activated, pressing a key in the Keyers panels also switchesto the associated menu when one of the key types Add, Lum, Lin, Lum orChrKeyis selected.

2.6.3 SELECTION OF THE KEYER ON DD20 / DD30

The Keyer key of the menu selection key block serves to select the different keyersin the menu. Repeated pressing cyclically calles the menus.

2

1

4

3

Exit

ME1

PP

ME2

Status

EXTRA

Access

MontProc

Stores

Transf

GPI

Install

Masks

EditEnbl

GPIEnbl

Exit

VTREnbl

Key




34

2.6.4 POSITIONING SIZING SOFTENING P/S/S

These three functions are available in the Lum/Add key and FG Fade modes, notin the DynaChrome.

Attention: When selecting P/S/S in the DynaChrome mode, the chromakey procedure automatically switches to FG Fade (quality loss)! When selecting P/S/S in the Lum Self Key mode, the fill linearization is automatically ommitted for the luminance key procedure (quality loss)!

All P/S/S parameters are stored in the KEY MEMORY, independent of the key type.With RESET, all P/S/S parameters are reset. When starting an automatic key adjustment (AKA), all P/S/S parameters are switched to OFF, but will be preserved.

The setting range amounts to +/ – 8 pixels with a smallest increment of 1/8 subpixel.A positive Positioning shifts the key signal with regard to the fill signal to the right.

The setting range amounts to +/ – 8 pixels with a smallest increment of 1/4 subpixelwith all permitted key types. A positive sizing extends the key signal, thus reducingthe foreground objects. By this way, incorrect object edges can be removed. How-ever, foreground details will also disappear more and more.A negative sizing increases the foreground object around the object edges. Darkor key-colored object edges are added.

The key signal is filtered with an adjustability of 10 steps. Object edges and detailsare softened.

Positioning

Sizing

Softening




35

2.6.5 CLEANUP / DENSITY AND CLIP / GAIN

Each key type provides the possibility of processing the key signal according to thismethod or that one. Each imaginable result can be obtained by both methods, butdepending on the purpose, this method or that one succeeds faster. The selection,however, should be made prior to the adjustment procedure – subsequent swit-ching will affect the result.

Both methods enhance the characteristic curve of the key signal. The only differ-ence is the invariant center of rotation of the characteristic curve.

Each automatic run resets all four parameters.

This method influences only one end of the key area and keeps the other one invari-ant.

CLEANUP influences only the area of the background. Key levels areincreasingly limited to black, i.e. ”cleaned”. Noise andslight shadows in this area will disappear.

DENSITY influences only the area of the foreground. Key levels are

increasingly limited to white to the unity value ”1”, whichcorresponds to the ”dense” foreground.

Cleanup / Density




37

2.6.6 SELECTIVITY MASKING

The menu is available with the two chromaKey modes DynaChrome and FG Fade.Thus, it is possible to select inside a mask area another selectivity than outside themask. This means, when – due to color conflicts within the picture – no compromisecan be found between the density of foreground objects of a certain color and thefreedom from fringes of other objects with the same color, the relevant objects canbe separated by the mask.

The separation lines remain invisible in the areas of the background. With correctadjustment, they also remain invisible in the areas of the foreground. Only mixedcolors at the object edges are then affected.

Method of procedure (only with critical patterns):

AKA run AUTO or CURS/AUTO

First manual optimization of SEL L or SEL R. Purpose is the object density.

Adjustment of SEL C, DENSITY and CLEAN UP

If no satisfactory result:

Call from the Key menu of the SEL MSK (mask menu) and selection of theMask Source

Check in the PVW position of the mask

Call the automatic selectivity adjustment S –AUTO or call the menu Chroma

Adjust and manually adjust Selectivities –I (inside the mask) and Selectivi-ties –O (outside the mask).




38

SEL MASK Menu

1. Call from the Key menu with SEL MSK.Simultaneously, SelMasking and SelMasking Preview PRV is switched on.

2. or from the Chroma Adjust menu with SEL MASK

resets the box mask to a visible, medium size and position.

switches the selectivity mask to the preview output.

starts an automatic selectivity procedure inside and outside the mask. Dependingon the quality of the pattern and on the size of the mask, a subsequent manual opti-mization may be required (menu Chroma Adjust).

Generally, the same mask sources are available as for the KeyMasking mode:

PATT1 PATT2 STORE BOX

The selection as SelectivityMasking or KeyMasking is alternatively, i.e. the selec-tion of PATT1 asSEL MASK might influence an earlier selection of PATT1 as KEYMASK.

inverts the selected mask.

activates the adjustment possibility for the edges of the mask:

LEFT RIGHT TOP BOTTOM

RESET

PVW

S-AUTO

Mask Source

INV

BOX




39

2.6.7 CHROMA KEY ADJUST MENU

HUE ,CHROMA und LUM Display and adjustment of the key color parameters.

SEL-C ,LEFT , RGHT und Y Display and adjustment of the selectivity parameters.

After selecting SEL MSK, LEFT, RIGHT and Y are divided into two parameter setswhich now can be separately adjusted:

LEFT-O ,RGHT-O und Y-O corresponds to the outer mask area and remains controllable also in the Chroma

Keyers panel.

LEFT-I ,

RGHT-I und Y-I corresponds to the inner mask area.




40

After an chroma key automatic run, first both sets are identical with the unmaskedset LEFT, RGHT and Y. Later deviations can be undone with MATCH.

Note: Masks from the mask store will be lost when switching off the mixer!

SEL MSK switches the maskability of the selectivity ON or OFF

MATCH draws the two selectivity sets xxx O and xxx I on the unmasked setLEFT, RIGHT and Y.

Selectivity Yseparates in similar way colors which should not be changed from those whichhave to be deprived by their key color. Influencing parameter in this case is howeverthe luminance.

Purpose: To deprive also the achromatic (light saturated) colors by their key color portion.

Example: Yellow hair in front of a blue wall effects gray helos. With Selectivity Y > 50%, the gray helos are increasingly deprived by blue with increasing luminance: they become yellow.After every AKA, selectivityY is set by default to 50% (ineffective).

COLOR CANCEL desaturates all colors of the fill signal which lie within a narrowangle range around the key color in the color circle.COL C is switched on by defaultafter each automatic run (not S –Auto).While pressing the KeyColor key, the ColorCancel effect is temporarily cancelledso that the adjustability of HUE and CHROMA is improved.

You will find further information in the corresponding sections of the Keyers panels.

Y

COL C




41

2.6.8 FORGROUND FADE-MENU

LUMOFS positive luminance offset to the subtractive key color luminance(only in the FG Fade mode).Raises or lowers the luminance level in the transition areas.Can be used in order to brighten too dark object edgesor to darken too bright edges, for better matching them to thebackground scene.

Also see FG Fade in the Keyers panel.

You will find further information in the corresponding sections of the Keyers panels or in the descriptions ofthe other Keyer menus.




42

2.6.9 DYNACHROME-MENU

In the activated status, the blanking width of the mixer is changed over to blankingfor analog signals. This is necessary if the signals of analogous Sources are deri-ved. The different blanking width result in black bars on the right and left pictureedge, i.e. disturbances particularly in the case of key invert.

Note: Function Crop can also be called from other keyer menus.

You will find further information in the corresponding sections of the Keyers panels or in the descriptions ofthe other Keyer menus.

Crop




43



2.7 Downstream keyers panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

45

2.7.1 DOWNSTREAM KEYER TRANSITION

The downstream keyers may be faded in the same way as the keyers in the MEsby selection and actuation in the Transition panel of the downstream keyer.

It is also possible to fade the downstream keyers independently from the next-tran-sition selection.

Auto Auto

Cut Cut

30

Transdur

Transdur

30

Coupl

DSK1 DSK2

OnOn

Cut Press Cut if you wish to execute a transition as hard cut.

Auto Press Auto to execute a fading transition of the type selected in the Transitionpanel at the preset transition duration. If the Auto key is pressed again, the transi-tion is aborted.

Trans dur The Trans duration function permits setting a transition length between 1 and 9999frames for DSK1 and for DSK2 .

Adjustment :

• Press Trans dur. The Trans dur key and the keys of the numeric keypad in theEXTRA panel will light up and prompt the entry of the transition duration.

• Enter the desired transition duration with the numeric keypad.The entry can be verified in the display. Errors can be deleted by pressing Clr.

• Confirm the entry with Enter.

• If Trans dur was pressed accidentally, press it again to disable the function.



Diamond digital DD20 / DD30 2.7 Downstream keyers panel

46

Coupl The Coupl key permits coupling both downstream keyers. If this key lights up, theAuto and Cut keys of both keyers are coupled and you can fade or switch both key-ers simultaneously with one key. If different transition durations are set for both key-ers, the transition durations are started simultaneously in Auto. If a transition dura-tion is entered during coupling, both durations are set at the same value.



2.7 Downstream keyers panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

47



2.8 Fade-to-black panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

48

2.8 FADE-TO-BLACK PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers include a fade-to-blackstage which permits fading the program picture to or from black

FTB

Transdur

50

Cut

Auto

FTB

FTB With FTB the fade-to-black function is enabled or disabled.

Cut Press Cut if wish to execute the transition as a hard cut. To signal this special opera-tional status, FTB flashes during the fade-out status. Press the flashing FTB keyto fade the program contribution in again and to switch off the fade-to-black functionafterwards.

Auto Press Auto to execute the transition at the preset transition duration. During thetransition the key will light up and the transition duration runs down in the display.If an automatic transition was started accidentally, the process can be stopped andreversed by pressing the Auto key or the FTB key again.To signal this special operational status, FTB flashes during the fade-out status.Press the flashing FTB key to fade the program contribution in again and to switchoff the fade-to-black function afterwards.



2.8 Fade-to-black panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

49

Trans dur The Trans duration function permits setting a transition length between 1 and 9999frames for fade-to-black.

Adjustment:

• Press Trans dur. The Trans dur key and the keys of the numeric keypad in theEXTRA panel will light up and prompt the entry of the transition duration.

• Enter the desired transition duration with the numeric keypad.The entry can be verified in the display. Errors can be deleted by pressing Clr.

• Confirm the entry with Enter.

• If Trans dur was pressed accidentally, press it again to disable the function.



2.9 Mattes panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

50

2.9 MATTES PANEL

The Diamond digital DD30 production switcher includes 20 (DD20: 14) indepen-dent matte generators for designing matte backgrounds, wipe borders, key borders

and captions in color.

MatteWash In addition to providing flat (plain) mattes each matte generator can also assist pic-ture design with the MatteWash function, which permits the creation of extremelysoft color wash effects between any two colors in horizontal, vertical or any diago-nal direction.

FractalTextures The new FractalTextures function extends the range of options for effective back-ground design. In this mode, the wipe signal of the wipe generator controls the colorwash effect of a matte generator between any two colors.

MatteStore The new MatteStore, a volatile store for wipe and key signals, permits creativedesign of complex brightness and color wash effects and of monochromatic pictu-res.

WiperWash The WiperWash function offers a new option for wipe border design by permittingcolor wash effects within the border.




51

Mattes

Chroma/

Luminance/

Position

Angle

HueSoftness

BGD1

BGD2

Mattesel

ME 1flat

ME 2wash

DSK

Matte1

Matte2

washSpec

Mode

W2B K1B K2B

W1B K1F K2F

BGD Matte The BGD 1/2 keys permit a direct selection of the background matte. The automaticdelegation system automatically selects the background matte if BGD Matte 1/2is pressed on the Background Bus or the Preset Bus.

Matte sel You can use Matte sel to scroll through the different mattes if you want to change

the matte proposed by the automatic delegation system.Each time you press this key, the following matte options will appear in cyclicalorder:

• Wipe Border,

• Key Fill,

• Key Border,

Matte 1, Matte 2 The Matte 1 and Matte 2 keys serve to switch on the mattes so that the desiredcolors can be adjusted.

Note: Please note that in case of unfavorable parameter settings only one matte will be visible in Wash or MatteStore mode. In this case we recommend to switch over to the Flat mode to adjust the color.




52

Adjusting the Color

Hue Chroma

Luminance

The Hue control serves to adjust the color. The Chroma control serves to adjustthe color saturation (chrominance). The Luminance control serves to adjust thedesired brightness of the color.

Note: Please note that certain combinations of chrominance and luminance values will cause overlevels and inadmissible colors. For this reason,an automatic control limits for instance the chrominance for defined luminance values.You can easily check this be setting the Chroma control to maximum and then turning the Luminance control slowly to maximum; the chro-

minance will be reduced with increasing luminance values.

flat The flat key serves a to select a flat (plain) matte.

wash The wash key serves to select a matte that is composed of a color wash betweenmatte 1 and matte 2.

If only the wash key lights up, it is possible to change the color wash individuallywith the Softness, Position, and Angle controls.Press Matte 1 or Matte 2 if you wish to adjust the matte with the Hue, Chroma, andLuminance controls.

Softness The Softness control permits adjusting the steepness, i.e. the width of the transi-

tion between the two colors.

Position The Position control serves to shift the position of the transition.

Angle With the Angle control, the transition angle can be rotated.

Spec wash The Spec wash key is used to modulate the color wash between matte 1 andwith background 1 matte 2 with the wipe or key signal selected for Matte Store.

These signals are derived from ME1.

For further information on the store control please refer to the section Stores Panel .

Spec wash The Spec wash key is used to control the color wash in the wipe border to the effectwith wipe border that a complete washing between the colors is made in the border. The softness

of the transition can be adjusted with the Softness control. The border width maybe adjusted with the Bord key and the associated control in the Wipe panel.

For further information on the wipe control please refer to the section Wipe Panel .

Hue/Softness

Chroma/Position

Luminance/Angle




53

Copying mattes

Adjusted mattes may be easily copied or replaced.

For further information please refer to the section Transfer Menu .

2.9.1 LIMITATION OF THE COLOR TRIANGLE

The new color triangle limitation (as from software version ”F”) controls the effectsof MATTE settings on

RGB color triangle PAL/NTSC level

It ensures that these limitation regulations are observed but also that the scope is

fully exploited. Both regulations are applicable at all times with the stricter regula-tion prevailing on a case by case basis. As from software release ”K”, the limitationcan be disabled.See SETUP menu, Color Limit ON.

RGB limitation All colors are permitted that do not produce an R, G or B level of > 100% or <0% (thismeans that about 75% of all conceivable Cb/Cr/Y combinations are not permitted).

PAL/NTSC limitation All colors are permitted as long as the total of luminance and chrominance doesnot exceed the (adjustable) COL LIMITER level.If COL LIMITER is set to 133, a PAL/NTSC overlevel of 33 % will admissible but therepresentation of all RGB values (including a saturated yellow) will be possible. If

COL LIMITER is set to 100, a 100 % level will be ensured but certain (yellow) colorswill be inadmissible.

Function If in a modification of hue, chroma, or luminance one of the limits is reached, theswitcher sends a BEEP signal (can be disabled) and attempts to realise thedemanded value at the expense of a different parameter.

A change in HUE may result in a chrominance correction. A change in CHR may result in a luminance correction. A change in LUM may result in a chrominance correction.

If an absolute limit is reached, no value will change any longer. A maximum chromamay generally be achieved at a medium luminance, i.e. subsequent decreases or

increases in LUM will result in a reduction in chrominance.

Limit mode ON/OFF The limit mode simplifies the search for colors with maximum saturation. This modeis enabled, when chrominance is set to maximum.In subsequent HUE changes, the color follows lines of maximum saturation. Forthis purpose, both chrominance and luminance are continuously updated automat-ically. If the chrominance or luminance setting is changed, this mode is disabledagain.

Note: There may be problems if mattes stored in EXTRA under older soft-ware versions are recalled and are now confronted with stricter limits(e.g. changed COL LIMITER). To achieve a clear, stable status, we

recommend storing the recalled and corrected (if applicable) mattes asecond time.



2.10 Wipe panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

54

2.10 WIPE PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers include up to two wipe gen-erators per mixing level, which can optionally be used for background or key transi-

tions, for mask design or for modulation of the background matte.

extend

Pos

Rev

Pos

FlipFlop

DSKWipe1

DSKWipe2

Wipe

ME 2Wipe1

ME 2wipe2

ME 1Wipe1

ME 1Wipe2

DVE1 DVE2

A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D

Bord Soft


WipeRot

Rot

Text

User

On On On On On On On On

Multi AsptWipeMod Matrix

Modif

Comp

The delegation keys ME 1, ME 2, DSK, Wipe 1 and Wipe 2 permit switching-overthe Wipe panel for the different applications. Wipe generator 2 is only available asan option.

Delegation wipe generator




55

In the wipe pattern selection panel 30 wipe patterns may be directly selected. Fur-ther wipe patterns can be recalled by pressing the Rotation/User key. In this modefurther rotating wipes are available in addition to the standard wipe patterns.The key legends show the available rotation wipes, indicating the center of rotationand the wipe direction.

RANDOM

A B C D E

F G H I J

K L M N O

P Q R S T

U V W X

Z + – . /

Y

User 1

RWD

User 2

REV

User 3

STOP

User 4

Play

User 5

FFWD

Note: In addition to these wipe patterns other wipe selections are possible internally. These additional patterns can, for instance, be called with an editor be entering the relevant wipe number. For further informa-

tion please refer to the Annex to these Operating Instructions.

Wipe Pattern selection




56

Via an RS 422 remote interface, the mixer can control some functions of definedDVE devices.

These functions are:

Effect selection

Positioning within the effect

Tape motion commands “TMC” (PLAY, STOP, REVERSE, REWIND, FFWD)

DVE Effectselection

Effectposition

TMC Protocol name Note

ABEKAS A53D yes yes yes DVE A53D Only Port1connector RS-232

ABEKAS A57 yes yes yes DVE A53D Only Port1connector RS-232

AMPEX ADO yes yes – DVE ADO

GVG DPM-700 yes yes yes DVE DPM

QUESTECHCHARISMA

yes yes – DVE CHARIS Special cablerequired

PINNACLE PRIZM yes yes – DVE PRIZM

The wipe selector keys also serve as alphabetical keypad. The key legends showthe letters at the bottom. With this keypad the letters A to Z and the characters +, –, . and / are available.If any mode requires text entry, a running light highlights the keypad.

In addition to providing standard patterns, the Diamond digital DD20/DD30 produc-tion switchers offer the possibility to prepare and store user-defined wipe patterns.These patterns can then be recalled directly by pressing User 1....5.

Preparation:

• Adjust the wipe pattern including any modifications.

• Hold down Rot/User.

• Select desired storage location by pressing User 1...5.

• The corresponding User key lights up for a short moment to acknowledge thestoring.

The Flip Flop key determines the wipe pattern direction. If this key is enabled, thewipe pattern direction is changed every time the fader is in final position or whenthe transition is completed.If you wish to change the preset wipe direction, press Rev.

DVE effects

Alphabeticalkeypad

User defined wipe patternsUser 1....5

Wipe patterndirection




57

Press Pos in the Positioner panel to enable the trackball. You can now use thetrackball to position the center of the selected wipe pattern within the visible picturearea.

Note: Please note that some wipe patterns (e.g. matrix wipe patterns) cannot be positioned.

If you enable the trackball by pressing Extend Pos in the Positioner, you can posi-tion the center of the selected wipe pattern at any place, even outside the visiblepicture area.

Note: Please note that in this mode, the wipe transition may reach its limit before the wipe pattern fully crosses the screen.

With the Text key and the wipe pattern selection keypad the user can recall inter-nally stored textures and store them in the matte store.When the Textures function is enabled, the signal of the wipe generator is sent tothe matte store, which disables Freeze in the process.As long as Text is enabled, the available wipe pattern may be recalled with the wipepattern selection keypad. The can be freely changed with the Mod, Multi, WipeComp, Wipe Rot, Bord, Soft and Aspect modifiers.You can also store the modified wipe pattern for future use:

• Press and hold down Rot/User.

• Press desired key in the wipe pattern selection keypad.

When the textures function is disabled, the matte store is ”freezed” and the wipeselected before Textures was enabled is restored.

Note: Please note that textures are only possible with the ME1 mixing level wipe pattern generator.

Tips: Nearly textures can are also be used for transitions.

The currently selected pattern can be stored as user wipe pattern and will then also be available outside the Textures mode. Similarly user wipe patterns can be recalled in the Textures mode.

Attractive pattern found experimentally can be stored as textures as follows:

Store pattern as user wipe pattern.Press Text .Recall user wipe pattern.Store wipe pattern as textures.

The texture pattern are contained in the ” Textures ” RAM file. This file may be stored on and recalled from a disk either separately or as a part of ” User Data ” or ” All Setups ” . For further information please refer to Disk and File menu .

Wipe pattern positioning

Textures




58

extend

Pos

Rev

Pos

FlipFlop

DSKWipe1

DSKWipe2

Wipe

ME 2Wipe1

ME 2wipe2

ME 1Wipe1

ME 1Wipe2

DVE1 DVE2



Rot

Text

User

On On On On On On On On

Bord SoftWipeRot

Multi AsptWipeMod Matrix

Modif

Comp

By means of the modifier keys Mod, Multi, Wipe Comb, Wipe Rot, Bord, Soft andAspect the standard wipe patterns can be changed and new patterns can becreated by combination of patterns.

The Modif reset key can be used to reset the enabled modifiers all at once.

The modifiers are switched on and off by actuation of the key. The respective func-tion is controlled with the controls located above the respective key. Function andnumber of the controls change depending on which modifier is selected.The different modifiers are mutually exclusive. The status is indicated with Onabove the respective key. The key lamps indicate the modifier to which the controlsare assigned.When the user changes over between the individual modifiers, the set values are

automatically stored and will be available when the modifier is selected again.

Wipe PatternModifier




59

Mod The Mod key serves to enable the wipe edge modulation.The following adjustments are possible:

AMPL modulation amplitudeSPD modulation speed

MULT modulation frequencySHAP modulation shape (square, triangle, sinewave).

In addition to these adjustments the wipe edge modulation may alsobe influenced with the following keys:

H Mod key horizontal wipe edge modulation onlyV Mod key vertical wipe edge modulation onlyLock Mod modulation is locked, i.e. the modulation does not

run through but produces a stationary picture.

Multi The Multi key serves to enable the wipe pattern multiplication

function.The following adjustments are possible:

H horizontal multiplicationV vertical multiplicatioO multiplication in radial direction, only for closed

wipe patterns (e.g. circle)X number of star points for the star wipe and flower.

Wipe Comb

The Wipe Comb key permits combining two different wipe patterns

(main and combination wipe). The following combinations are possible:

MIX multiplicative mixing of two wipe patternsNAM non additive mixing of two wipe patterns

The controls can be used to adjust the dimensions of the combination.With NAM a different coupling can be achieved with different directionof rotation.The main wipe pattern is selected in the wipe pattern selection keypadwith enabled or disabled Wipe Comb function. The combination wipeis selected in the wipe pattern selection keypad with the MIX or NAM

key held down. When Wipe Comb is enabled, the keys of bothselected wipes light up in the wipe pattern selection keypad.




60

Example:

MIX

NAM

Circle + square

Circle + square

Note: Please note that not all combinations are possible.The following combinations are blocked: – wipes of the same base patterns – wipes that are in themselves combination wipes – wipes having their origin or point of rotation in a corner or at the edge of the picture.

Wipe Rot The Wipe Rot key serves to enable the wipe pattern rotation.The following adjustments are possible:

ANGL setting a fixed rotation angle

SPD setting the rotation speedCOUP rotation angle depending on fader position. Thenumber of rotations can be selected with thecontrol.

Bord The Bord key serves to enable the wipe pattern border function.The following adjustments are possible:

WIDT border width adjustment. The border width maybe adjusted by clockwise or counter-clockwiserotation.If the border is made transparent with Opac, the

direction of rotation of the border widths controldetermines which picture component will be seenin the border.

OPAC adjustment of the transparency

If the Soft modifier is also enabled, the following additional adjust-ments are possible:

SOFT adjustment of the border softnessSYM adjustment of the softness symmetry




61

Soft The Soft key permits adjusting the softness of the wipe edge.The following adjustments are possible:

SOFT adjustment of the softness width

If the Bord modifier is also enabled, the following additional adjust-ments are possible:

WIDT adjustment of the border widthOPAC adjustment of the transparencySYM adjustment of the softness symmetry

Aspect The Aspect key permits adjusting the aspect ratio of the wipe pattern.The following adjustments are possible:

H-ST horizontal stretchV-ST vertical stretch

RATio By clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation thewipe pattern may be stretched horizontally and/orvertically.

Note: Please note that in Stretch, a linear piece is inserted in the wipe pattern. With Ratio the aspect ratio of height and width is changed.Please note also the width of the borders with Stretch and Ratio.

The settings of one wipe generator can easily be copied to another. Similarly bothsettings may be exchanged.

For further information please refer to the section Transfer Menu .

If the wipe generator is used for a function other than background transition, thesize of the wipe pattern may be adjusted with the SIZE control. When a modifieris enabled, the size adjustment is disabled.

If you want to enable the size adjustment again,

– disable the relevant modifier; and – press the delegation key for the respective wipe generator.

Copying wipe settings

SIZE




62

2.10.1 WIPE SELECTION CODE FOR CONTROL PANEL AND EDITOR OPERATION

The enclosed list contains all wipe patterns available in the switcher together withtheir specific wipe number (in line with SMPTE). The table also indicates whichmodifiers are possible with the individual wipe patterns.

All wipe patterns that cannot be directly selected with the wipe selection keypadmay be recalled with a register selection in the EXTRA panel.

The register number to be selected is the listed SMPTE wipe number plus 200.

Example: Selection of wipe no 138 (= register 338)

No EXTRA function selected. Enter register no. 338. Press Enter. Wipe pattern is recalled. The wipe pattern may subsequently be stored as a user wipe and

is thus directly available by simple key actuation.

Note: For DD5 switchers only the basic pattern can be used!




63




64




65




66




67




68




69




70




71




72




73




74




75




76




77



2.11 Masks panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

78

2.11 MASKS PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers provide extensive maskingcapabilities which enable the operator to correct even difficult pictures. For the key-

ers, square masks are available. As an alternative, also the wipe patterns of thewipe generator may be used for masking. The volatile masks store (one store foreach mixing level) offers new ways of masking. A key signal or a pattern signal maybe stored. The PaintModeMasking feature permits the creation of own maskswhich are perfectly adapted to the individual requirements.

With the Diamond digital DD20 the mask operation is made in a menu. Menu con-trol is also possible with the DD30. For further information please refer to Masks Menu .

Force Mask MaskPosinvFGND

rightleft

top/Gain

bottom/Clip

Pattn1

Pattn2

MaskStore

Box MaskBus

MaskPVW

ME 1Key1

ME 1Key2

ME 2Key1

DSK1

DSK2

ME 2Key2

Mask

Source

ME1 ME1 The delegation keys permit delegating the Masks panel to another keyer if you wantKey1 Key2 to change the keyer proposed by the automatic delegation system.

ME2 ME2 Key1 Key2

DSK1 DSK2

The Pattn1, Pattn2, Box, and Mask store keys serve to select the type of maskto be used for masking.




80

Creating a wipe mask

Pattn 1, Pattn 2 Using Pattn 1 or Pattn 2 one of the wipe generators can be selected for masking.The wipe pattern can be directly selected with the wipe pattern selection keypad

in the Wipe panel. The size of the wipe pattern can be adjusted with the SIZE controlin the Wipe panel.

S I Z E

You can freely position the wipe mask in the picture with the trackball in the Posi-tioner panel after you have enabled Pos in the Wipe panelDie Trickmaske kann beliebig im Bild positioniert werden.

For further information on the wipe pattern control please refer to the section Wipe Panel .

Note: Please note that the wipe generators can be used simultaneously for several applications which may interact with one another.

Mask store The Mask store key serves to select the mask store as mask source. The auto-

matic delegation system automatically switches over the Stores panel to Maskstore control.For further information on Store control and PaintModeMasking please refer tothe section Stores Panel .

Mask Bus If Mask Bus is used as a mask source, the luminance component of any input sig-nal can be used as a mask, with adjustable gain and clip. In order to select thesource, hold down the Mask Bus key and select the input on the Aux Buses keybank. For the mask bus signal, the Clip and Gain controls operate in the same wayas for Luminance Key.

Note: A mask bus is available in any mixing level.




81

Forc FGND The Forc FGND key serves to select whether the mask should suppress (mask)or force the foreground picture. If the key lights up, Forced Foreground is active.

Mask inv The Mask inv key can be used to invert the mask signal.

This means that, for instance, with a square mask, not the inside but the outsideof the square is used for masking.

Mask PVW The Mask PVW key is used to highlight the mask signal on the preview monitor.This function serves to adjust the mask.

Note: In Mask PVW mode, the mask is only represented as a 1-bit signal.If you want to exactly position a mask with softness, simply switch on the mask with the Mask on key in the Keyers panel.



2.12 Positioner panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

83

The following indications are possible:

Level Wipegenerator

Masks CursorChroma Key

Maskgenerator

ME1 WIP1

WIP2

MSK1

MSK2

KEY1

KEY2ST111

ME2 WIP3

WIP4

MSK3

MSK4

KEY3

KEY4ST211

PP WIP4

WIP6

MSK5

MSK6

KEY5

KEY6ST311

The automatic delegation system automatically assigns the trackball to the cur-

rently used functions. If you want to assign the trackball to another function, selectthe corresponding function in the relevant panel.

The definition of the trackball can easily be adapted to the current requirements.For further information please refer to section Set-up .



2.13 Stores panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

84

2.13 STORES PANEL

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers include four volatile storesfor video signals and key, shadow or mask signals which permit the creation of neweffects without using external units.

The video store permits storing a 4:2:2 video signal which can then be faded inas freeze picture.

The matte store serves to store a key or wipe signal which can then be used formodulating the background matte. The matte store is also used for storing Fractal- Textures .

The mask store permits storing a key or wipe signal or creating own masks withPaintModeMasking.

The stores of the Diamond digital DD20 are controlled in a menu. Menu control isalso possible for the DD30. For further information please refer to section Stores

Menu .

Mask

Pattn

Paint

Matte

Pattn

Field

Paint

Shdw

Key1

Shift

Rub

Video

Key2

Freeze

Clear

ShadowOpacity

21

mode

ME1

PP

Stores

Store Store Store Store

DVEME1

Controlwithoutfunction

ME1 The delegation keys serve to assign the Stores panel for Mask Store and ShdwStore to the MEs if you want to change the ME proposed by the automatic delega-

ME2 tion system.PP




85

The delegation keys Mask store, Matte store, Shdw Store and Video store serveto delegate the control functions to one of the stores.

The Field key permits selecting for each store separately whether both fields or aparticular field should be recalled from the store. The key is enabled in all storemodes.Each time you press this key, three operational statuses will appear in cyclicalorder.

• FRAME (key lamp off)

• 1st FIELD (key lamp on)

• 2nd FIELD (key lamp on)

For the mask store also the read-in operation can be switched over to Field orFrame mode. This avoids field flickering during storing.

The Freeze key serves to store a picture signal. The key lamp lights up in Freezemode. In Mask Store this key is disabled.

Note: Please note that a signal is delayed by one frame when it passesthrough the store.

To store a video picture, proceed as follows:

• Enable the Video Store key in the Aux Buses panel and select a picture source.

In addition to the input sources you can of course also select the matte signalsor the preview or program outputs.

• The stored picture signal can be recalled as input signal with the keys 2nd and

Video Store in the Source Selection panel.

The signals used in the background store are taken from ME1.

To store a background, proceed as follows:

• Select the signal to be stored in the Matte store with Pattn1 / Pattn2 or

Key1 / Key2 in the Stores panel.

• To store a wipe signal select Pattn1 or Pattn2. The desired wipe and the modifi-

cation can then be selected in the Wipe panel.

• If you want to store a texture in the Matte store, press Text in the Wipe panel

of ME1 and select the texture with the wipe pattern selection keys.• To assign a key signal as a source to the store, select Key1 or Key2.

The required adjustments can subsequently be made in the Keyers panel.

Store delegation

Field

Freeze

Video Store

Matte Store




86

The signals used in the mask store are taken from the same ME.

To store a mask, proceed as follows.

• Select the signal to be stored in the mask store with Pattn1 / Pattn2 or

Key1 / Key2 in the Stores panel.

• In order to assign a key signal as a source to the store, select Key1 or Key2.


• To store a wipe signal, select Pattn1 or Pattn2. The desired wipe and the

modification can then be selected in the Wipe panel.

• Press Clear to delete the contents of the mask store.

• The Mask shift key can be used to shift the output picture of the store with the

trackball.

If you wish to create an individual mask, it is recommended to use a wipe signal asbrush. For this purpose, select the corresponding generator with Pattn1 or Pattn2.

• For a free design of a mask, select Paint mode to enable the PaintModeMas-

king mode. The preview monitor now displays the wipe as a cursor which canbe freely positioned with the trackball.Type of wipe and any modifications can be selected in the Wipe panel. The sizecan be adjusted with the SIZE control.

• Start the painting process with Paint and paint using the cursor as brush.

• Press Rub to use the cursor as rubber.

• Press Clear to delete the contents of the mask store.

• Press Mask shift to shift the output picture of the store with the trackball.

If a key signal is selected as brush, either the key signal may be stored as freezeor, in the case of a moving picture such as camera pan or zoom, a mask may becreated.

Note: If a key or pattern signal is stored, Mask store is automatically selected in the Masks panel and Mask PVW is enabled . The mask is displayed in Mask PVW mode as 1-bit signal only. If you wish a precise positioning of a mask with softness, select the associated keyer in the Transition panel and switch on the mask.

Mask Store

PaintMode Masking




87



Status

EXTRA

Access

Mont

Proc

Stores

Transf

GPI

Install

Masks

KEY

2.14 Menu panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

89

Delegation keys for the MASKS and STORES switcher menus

Keypad for the selection of the various menus. Some menus may also be selecteddirectly from the STATUS menu.

VT R Enbl: The remote control is enabled by the VTR Enbl key.

Edit Enbl: Enable key for external editor control

GPI Enbl: Enable key for preset GPI inputs.For further information on the preselection please refer toGPI Menu .

Exit from the current menu and go back to the higher order menu.

ME1

PP

ME2

ExitVTR

Enbl

EditEnbl

GPIEnbl

ExitExit



2.15 Set up Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

90

2.15 SET UP

With the Set up function you can set the system parameters of the switcher andeasily change them for a desired configuration.

Control is made via the 16-digit display on the EXTRA panel and the keys Store,Bank, and Edit located directly below the display as well as via the cursor keys and.

7

4

1

8

5

2

9

6

3

Enter

EditStore

Undo

Cut Auto

Trans

INS DELMOD

H TM TR TM TRAJ

next

dur

1 2 3 4

S E L E C T E B O X >

EXTRA

VIEW

0LOOP

Bank

ClearFree

Set up




91

Starting Set up

Simultaneously press Store and Edit to enable the Set up mode. The keys changetheir functions:

Store • Press Store to leave Set up mode.V

• If your are in a sub-loop during set up, you are returned to the mainloop.

Bank • Press Bank to cycle through the set up points of a loop.

Edit • Press Edit to select the desired set up adjustment. If a ”>”(please see figure below) appears at the right edge of the display,a sub-loop can be recalled with Edit.

• Moving to next setup point in a loop.

• Moving to previous setup point in a loop.

Note: When the Set up mode is enabled, the Edit and Store keys must not be active.

>Edit

Store

Store + Edit

Store

Bank

Setup mode with main and sub-loop

Main loop

Sub-loop

or Bankor




92

Adjusting analog values

If the set up mode requires adjustment of an analog value, one control in the Wipepanel is marked with ****. This control can be used to adjust the desired value.

* * * *




93

Possible adjustments in Set up mode

S E L E C T E B O X : >In the sub-loop all E-Box types in the network can be indicated and

then be selected with Edit. A selected E-Box is marked with an aster-isk.The E-box has a freely selectable 10-digit name with an extensionindicating the unit type (e.g. D30).

S E L E C T MC: >Only applies to DD5 and DD10 control panel!In this sub – loop, the control authority may be fixed for individual swit-cher levels and control functions in a connected DD20 or DD30 E – box:

SEL.ME1: f mtwwkkSEL.ME2: f mtwwkk

SEL.PP: f mtwwkk

With the first actuation of the Edit key, the control panel is assignedthe control authority for the following functional groups:

m matrixt transitionw wipe1w wipe2k key1k key2

The display mtwwkk changes to capital letters MTWWKK.

With the second actuation of the Edit key, the control panel is alsoassigned the control authority of the fader (indication f). The displayf changes to F.The control authority may only be revoked in the ACCESS menu ofthe switcher.

P P – R E V I E W: N O R MOnly applies to DD20 and DD30 E –box!Edit permits switching over between NORM, DUAL or CASC. NORM Output MAIN PVW/PST depends on LOOK AHEAD

PVW (PP), output DP does not supply a usable signal,FxLOOP is possible in PP.

DUAL Output DP shows (PGM+PST)+DSK1,output MAIN PVW/PST shows (PGM+PST)+DSK2,FxLOOP is not possible in PP.

CASC Output DP shows (PGM+PST)+DSK1,output MAIN PVW/PST shows (PGM+ PST)+DSK1+2,FxLOOP is not possible in PP.

Note: (PGM+PST) = background transition




94

Automatic switch-off of DSK1 and/or 2.With SETUP item DSK DROP the user can select whether a visibleDSK will be switched off when a PP PGM-bus button is pushed.

DSK DROP FunctionOFF DSK DROP inactive: DSKs remain unchanged

DSK1 DSK1 is switched off, DSK2 unchanged


BOTH Both DSKs are switched off

The content of the CLEAN FEED output is selectable using SETUPitem CLEAN FEED OUT.

The following table shows which signals are included in CLEAN

FEED:

CLEANFEEDOUT

DD5 DD10 DD20DD30

DD20 / DD30PP = Layered

1 BGD BGD BGD 1 layer from bottom(normally BGD-A)

2 BGD+

under key

BGD+

under key

BGD+

under key

2 layers from bottom(normally

BGD-A + BGD-B)

3 BGD+

under key+

over key

BGD+

under key+

over key

BGD+

under key+

over key

3 layers from bottom(normally

BGD-A +BGD-B +

Key1)

4 BGD+

under key+

over key

BGD+

under key+

over key+

DSK

BGD+

under key+

over key

4 layers from bottom(normallyBGD-A +BGD-B +Key1 +Key2)

D S K D R O P: O NON o

C L E A N F E E D O U T. 1




95

The Edit button can be used to switch over between ANY, FIELD1 andFIELD2.The setting concerns the switching of the crosspoints on all busses(without Ext Anz), the start of auto transitions, switching with Cut andthe recalling of snapshots and timelines.

In position ANY switching occurs at the beginning of the next frame.In position FIELD1/2 switching or starting occurs before the corre-sponding field.

The Edit button can be used to switch over between ON and OFF.In OFF position the V-gap is replaced by BLACK.In ON position the information contained in the V-gap (VITS, videotextetc.) are kept.

B G/P S T G E R M: O NEdit permits switching over between ON and OFF.If ON, the Program and Preset key banks are reversed, i.e. Programis on the lower bank and Preset is on the upper bank.

Changing of AUTO- and CUT-key in the transition-panels.

B L A C K B T N : . . .Press Edit to switch the BLACK picture source optionally to the right-hand or the left-hand side of the key bank. The left or right position isindicated in the display with a bar symbol.

M O U S E G A I N : 5 0 %The mouse gain can be adjusted between 12 and 100 % with the ****control in the Wipe panel.

T – B A L L G A I N : 5 0 %The trackball gain can be adjusted between 12 and 100 % with the ****control in the Wipe panel.

L O W – L I G H T : 3 0 %The low light of all key lamps can be adjusted between 0 and 100 %(16 steps) with the **** control in the Wipe panel.

B E E P: O NEdit enables switching between the states ON and OFF.If ON, a beep sound in the control panel indicates that in the adjust-ment of an analog value the final position has been reached.

The level limitation for the internal matte signals will be switched ONor OFF by pressing EDIT.

C O L . L I M I T E R : 1 3 0 %The level limitation for the internal matte signals can be adjustedbetween 100 and 130 % with the **** control in the Wipe panel.

A U T O P V W : O NPress Edit to enable or disable the Auto PVW mode. In enabledcondition the key PVW, mask PVW or the chroma key cursor signalof the respective mixing level is switched on the PVW bus.

F I E L D D O M I N : A N Y

V E R T T R A N S P : O N

C U T R I G H T: ON

C O L O R L I M I T : O N




97

D V E 1 C O N N E C T I O N >In the sub-loop, the inputs can be selected separately for the DVE1KEY and DVE1 VIDEO signals. The inputs IN1 ... IN32 are available.In addition, the interfaces DVE1 PORT IN1 ... IN3 can be selected.

DVE1 (2) DELAY: When the limit position is reached, the trans-formed signals are removed from the signal pathwith a delay. The delay can be selected between

0 and 16 fields. It is advisable to select a delay at which the effect just stops jumping at the end of the DVE transition

DVE1 (2) TALLY: Here you can select either Internal or External.

Note: For external Tally evaluation the READY Input on TALLY IN 1must be closed. See also: DD Instalation Manual andSupplements.

G P I S T A N D R D : G P I 7Enables remote switching of television standard using the selectedGPI input GPI1...8.

Contact OPEN = 625/50Contact CLOSED = 525/60

An upgrade of OUTPUT PROCESSOR board RY1911, RY1912,RY1914, RY1916 respectively is required.Ensure that the seleted GPI does not trigger another pre-selectedGPI (e.g. AUTO-Transition).

S T A N D A R D : 6 2 5 / 5 0 TV standard 625/50 versus 525/60 is selctable from the control panel(SETUO ITEM: STANDARD). An upgrade of OUTPUT PROCESSORboard RY1911, RY1912, RY1914, RY1916 respectively is required.

G P I F O R M A T : G P I 8Enables remote switching of image size format using the selected GPIinput GPI1...8.

Contact OPEN = 4/3Contact CLOSED = 16/9

Ensure that the seleted GPI does not trigger another pre-selectedGPI (e.g. AUTO-Transition).

V I D E O R A T I O : 4 / 3With the Edit key you can switch over between the 16/9 and the 4/3formats.In ”16/9” position, the switcher processes video signals of an aspectratio of 16:9.In ”4/3” position, the switcher processes video signals of an aspectratio of 4:3.

D V E 2 C O N N E C T I O N >




98

R E P L. A S Y N C: ONEdit permits the selection of different modes for the treatment ofasynchronous sources in the switching levels (ME1, ME2, PP):

ON: If Background/Program are asynchronous, enabled keyers are

disabled.If Background/Program are synchronous and the fillsignal of a keyer becomes asynchronous, the enabled keyer isdisabled.If Background/Program or Preset are asynchronousand a transition is selected, a cut is performed at the end of thetransition.

OFF: Asynchronous signals are phased over H and are passed.

O U T P U T R O U N D : >In the sub-loop, the video quantisation can be switched to 8 or 10 bitfor each output separately.

G E N L . P H A S E : 1 0 0 0With the **** control in the Wipe panel the timing of the switcher canbe adapted to the synchronising Genlock signal within the range of0 ... 4095 steps.This corresponds to a delay of 3 lines.

L O A D S O F T W A R E >In a sub-loop it is possible to select between the following loadingmodes:

load my panelload ebox masterload ebox slaveload other panel.

For further information please refer to the separate description insection 5.1.

S W – V E R S . :S W – V E R S . : L L L

Software version of EBox slave

Software version of EBox master

Software version of panel




99



2.16 Auto-Delegation Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

100

2.16 AUTO DELEGATION

To simplify operation, the mixers include an auto delegation system. From softwareversion ”G”, the auto delegation system was substantially improved and extended.

The available auto delegation facilities are represented in detail in the followingmixer-specific delegation diagrams. The diagrams are divided into functionalgroups (Wipe, Mask, ...) which the keys or status are assigned to.

For example: If key Next Key1 is pressed on the Transition control panel, a de-legation of the key control panel is carried out automatically. Depending on the sta-tus of the individual keys on the key control panel, a further delegation is possiblyinitiated.



2 .1 6 A u t oD el e g a t i on

D i am on d d i gi t al D D 2 0 / D D 3 0

1 0 1

VIDEO

Aspect

Multi

Rotation

Wipe WipeTrackball

Matte Chroma Key Transition XBAR To DVE Only Misc. MenuKey MatteMouse Bus Del

COL 1

COL 2

Video

MPR 1

Border

3

1

2

3

4

MPR 2

Border

4

2

Hue

2

2

2

Stores/ Mont.Proc(MPR 1/2)

Stores/ Mont.Proc(MPR 1/2)

Stores

Masks

2

Stores

MPR1/2

DVE 1

DVE 2

AUX 1

AUX 2 AUX 3

AUX 4

AUX 5

AUX 6

Video

Mont.Proc

PVW

ext. Aux

DVE 1/2

ME1 WIPE1/2

ME2 WIPE1/2

PP WIPE 1/2

Position

Shadow Store

BGD A/B

Key 1/2

ext.Pos

Border

Modulation

Combine

Soft

Matrix

Rotation

Multi

Border

Shadow

Drop

Outline

Mask On

Mask Key

Matte Fill

Pattern 1

Chroma Key

Pattern 2

Couple Split

ME 1

ME 2ME1/ME2/PP

MATTE SEL

FLAT

WASH

SPEC WASH

COL 1

COL 2

MATTE 1

MATTE 2

Position

ME1 KEY1/2

ME2 KEY1/2

PP KEY1/2

Cursor

Grain Cancel

ME

ME1/ME/PP

MASK/

MATTE/

SHADOW/

VIDEO

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Key 1

Key 2

Bus

Paint

Rubout

Shift

Key 1

Key 2

ME1 KEY1ME1 KEY2

ME2 KEy1

ME2 KEY2

PP DSK1

PP DSK3

Box

Store

Bus

Pattern 1/2

Next Key 1

Next Key 2

DVE

Wipe 1

Wipe 2

1

Storesmenu

Hue

Digipot Digipot

Stores

Masks

Inkgeber im Chroma Key FeldDigipot on Chroma Key panel

= Tastendruck / Key pressed

= Zustand (Funktion war vor der Delegation schon eingeschaltet). / (functio was enabled prior to delegation).

= Bei Betätigung keine Auswirkung auf das Videosignal. / when activated, no effect on the video.

= Delegationsstop / Delegation stop

= Im delegierten Feld wird weiter delegiert. / On the delegated panel, delegation is continued.

Nur bei Tastendruck. / Only when key is pressed.

Nur wenn ”AUTO MENU” = ON. / Only when ”AUTO MENU” = ON.

Wenn Key-Border und Matte Fill gleichzeitig angewählt sind, hat bei der Matte-Delegation der Border die höhere Priorität. / When Key Border and Matte Fill are selected simultaneously, the border has the higher priority when performing Matte delegation.

Delegation erfolgt nur in Verbindung mit angewähltem AUX1...6 Bus. / Delegation is only made in conjunction with selected AUX1...6 bus.





1 0 2

Aspect

Multi

Rotation

Wipe Wipe Matte Transition Stores Mask Bus Del To DVE only MenuKey Trackball XBAR

COL 1

COL 2

Video

MPR 1

Border

3

MPR 2

Border

4

2

Hue

2

2

2

Stores/ MPR 1/2

Stores/ MPR 1/2

Stores

Masks

2

Stores

MPR1/2

DVE 1

DVE 2

AUX 1

AUX 2

AUX 3

AUX 4

AUX 5

AUX 6

Video

Mont.Proc

PVW

ext. Aux

DVE 1/2

ME1 WIPE1/2

ME2 WIPE1/2

PP WIPE 1/2

Position

Shadow Store

BGD A/B

Key 1/2

ext.Pos

Border

Modulation

Combine

Soft

Matrix

Aspect

Rotation

Multi

Border

Shadow

Drop

Outline

Mask On

Mask Key

Matte Fill

Pattern 1

Chroma Key

Pattern 2

Couple Split

ME1/ME2/PP

MATTE SEL

FLAT

WASH

SPEC WASH

COL 1

COL 2

MATTE 1

MATTE 2

Position

ME1 KEY1/2

ME2 KEY1/2

PP KEY1/2

Cursor

Grain Cancel

ME1/ME/PP

Key 1

Key 2

Box

BusStores

Pattern 1/2

Next Key 1

Next Key 2

DVE

Wipe 1

Wipe 2

1

Storesmenu

Digipot DigipotKey

Chroma DigipotChroma KeyMatte

ME1/KEY1/2

MASKS

ME2/KEY1/2

PP DSK 1/2





1 0 3

Wipe Wipe Matte Transition Stores Mask Bus Del To DVE only MenuKey Trackball XBAR

Digipot DigipotKey

Ch rom a Di gi po tChroma KeyMatte

Pattern 1/2

Box

Bus

Store

ME1Prim/Sec

ME2Prim/Sec

DSK Prim/Sec

Store

1

2

3

4

Hue

5

6

VIDEO

ME1/ME2/PP

Mask/

Matte/

Shadow

Video

5

VIDEO

Pattern 1/2

Key 1/2

Bus

Paint

VIDEO

Rubout

Shift

2

Masks

2

Stores

2Stores

2

Stores

2

Stores

VIDEO

ME

MASK/

MATTE/

SHADOW/

Video

Stores

VIDEO

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Key 1

Key 2

VIDEO

Bus

Paint

6

Rubout

Shift

= Tastendruck / Key pressed

= Zustand (Funktion war vor der Delegation schon eingeschaltet). / S tatus (function was enabled prior to delegation).

= Bei Betätigung keine Auswirkung auf das Videosignal. / When activated, no effect on the video.

= Delegationsstop / Delegation stop= Im delegierten Feld wird weiter delegiert. / On the delegated panel, delegation is continued.

Nur bei Tastendruck. / Only when key is pressed.

Nur bei ”AUTO MENU” = ON. / Only when ”AUTO MENU” = ON.

Wenn Key-Border und Matte Fill gleichzeitig angewählt sind, hat bei der Matte-Delegation der Border die höhere Priorität. / When Key-Border and Matte Fill are selected simultaneously, the border has the higher priority when performing Matte delegation.

Delegation erfolgt nur in Verbindung mit angewähltem AUX1...6 Bus./ Delegation is only made in conjunction with selected AUX1...6 bus.

Die restlichen Tasten des Masken-Felds schalten bie ”AUTO MENU” = ON das Masken-Menü auf. / The remaining keys of theMask panel switch to the Mask menu when ”AUTO MENU” = ON.

Die restlichen Tasten des Store – Felds schalten bei ”AUTO MENU” = ON das Store-Menü auf. / The remaining keys of the Storepanel switch to the Store menu ”AUTO MENU” = ON.



3. Menu control Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

104

3. MENU CONTROL

NOTE The menus shown in section 3 are available for USERS with system permit.

For USERS with lower permit level, the menus differ and only some of the menu options are available.

3.1 SHORT INTRODUCTION TO THE MENU SYMBOLS

3.1.1 CONTROL WITH GRAPHIC OBJECTS

Since we understand and process information much faster when it is represented

in form of pictures or graphs, the design of the menu is based on graphic objects.This type of user interface is well established in the world of personal computers.It simplifies the access for all users that are not familiar with EDP.

Depending on the selected mode, the menus only show options that can beimmediately enabled in the current status. This makes the operation much clearerand simpler.

The functions may be selected with the softkeys directly assigned to the respectivemenu.

Several frequent operating functions and system messages are represented withgraphic symbols as follows:

Active/inactive status

Inactive operating statuses are represented with white title on dark background orwith dark symbols. Active operating statuses are represented with black title onlight background or with light symbols.

COMMON

USER LOGIN

Example for function selection: COMMON user is logged in.

Functions with options

If a control function permits several options, these options can be called by press-ing the same function key several times. The menu field will show these controlfunctions as follows:

MODE

NONE




105

The control function MODE in the ACCESS menu can thus be scrolled throughfrom NONE to SHARED and EXCL. etc. in cyclical order.

The text in the display above the respective function changes accordingly.

Autorepeat function:

If the corresponding function key is held down, all selection options are scrolledthrough. The Autorepeat function will stop in starting position (e.g. NONE).

Cursor control

For system configuration, setups, etc., some menus include cursor functions.The cursor can be moved in the entry fields with the arrow keys.

BLANKInsertion of blanks in text

RUBOUTDeletion of character left of cursor

Autorepeat function:

If the corresponding key is held down, the functions are executed continuously.

Leaving the menu

In all menus the EXIT softkey is used to leave the menu.

EXIT

If you press the associated function key, the system returns to the higher ordermenu.

3.1.2 OPERATIONAL AID BY RUNNING LIGHT IN KEYS

In various operational sequences you may have to select a second option after youhave selected a function. To facilitate the operation, the relevant keys in the respec-tive mode are highlighted with a running light or by conection of all lamps of the key-blok (e.g. wipe pattern keypad for the entry of text).Thus you can easily see which options are available to produce the desired effect.If you press one of this keys, the light will go out.




106

3.1.3 WARNING DIALOGUE

To facilitate the operation, the software of the switcher contains a number of warn-ings which, for instance, point to internal switcher lockings in case of an illogicaloperational step. These warnings are self-explanatory and are faded in in the menufield of the switcher.Normally the operational step and the warning can be cancelled without changingthe current setting with the CANCEL softkey or by pressing any key. Some warn-ings also permit the use of further softkeys, which are appropriately labelled, inorder to cancel the locking and thus select the desired function at the expense ofanother function.

Example of a warning dialogue:




107

3.1.4 AUTOMATIC ANALOGUE VALUE INDICATION IN MENU

As from software version ”F”, when analogue values are changed, a window can bedisplayed in the selected menu which shows the various settings in a bar graph.This mode can be enabled or disabled in Installation sub menu Config Panel.

For DD20 and DD30 switchers, the window can be switched off by pressing Exit (onthe right hand side below the display).For DD5 and DD10 switchers, click on an EXIT panel on the menu monitor using themouse or the trackball to switch off the window.



3.2 Menu overview Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

108

3.2 MENU OVERVIEW

STATUS TRANS

GPI – AC

EXTRA

ACCESS

INSTALL

DISK

KEY

INPUT

CORR

CONFPANEL

CONFE – BOX

AUX

USERS

PASSWD

EXTRAEDIT

DEFINEMEMO

SERVICE

DIAG

COUPLE

IDENT

GPI

FILE

IN / OUT

MONTPROC

(DD20/DD30 only)

CHANGE

EXTERNAUX

INPUT

MPR 1/2MAIN

MPR 1/2PIXMAN

MPR 1/2MATTE

NOTE:

In General the menus are selected from the higher order STATUS menu of the switcher.

In case of DD20 and DD30 switchers, the MASK and STORE menus can be selected with the menu selection buttons.In case of DD5 and DD10 switchers the menus are displayed automatically by the automatic delegation system, if a key in the corresponding panels is actuated.



3.2 Menu overview Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

109



3.3 Status menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

110

3.3 STATUS MENU

The STATUS menu serves as the main menu for the selection of the various sub-menus (please refer to Menu Overview ) and offers a range of higher orderswitcher settings that are not tied to any particular operating mode. The STATUS

menu also informs about the status of the various mixing levels.




111

3.3.1 INDICATION OF THE MIXING LEVEL STATUS

Video

Picture component 0....100% visible

KeyType of transition

Name of the picture component

Video

Picture component 0....100% visible

KeyType of transition

Name of the picture component




112

3.3.2 SELECTION OF SUBMENUS

TRANS

Press the associated key to select the TRANS submenu which permits copying orexchanging settings between the various mixing levels.

GPI –AC

Press the associated key to select the GPI-AC submenu which serves to define thesignal parameters for the GPI inputs and outputs.

EXTRA

Press the associated key to select the EXTRA submenu which serves to store, pro-cess and recall switcher statuses and operational sequences.

ACCESS

Press the associated key to select the ACCESS submenu which serves to enterthe users of the switcher with their respective access rights and to determine thecontrol authority for switcher electronics (E-box) in the network or for parts of aswitcher electronics.

MONTPROC

Press the associated key to select the MONT PROC submenu (option).See section 3.13

INSTALL

Press the associated key to select the INSTALL submenu which serves to definethe system configuration.

DISK

Press the associated key to select the DISK submenu which permits file manage-ment within the switcher and the entire network

KEY

Press the respective key to select the KEY submenu which permits defining the keyparameters of the key signals. See section 2.5

BUSCORR

Press the associated key to select the BUS CORR submenu which serves tomodify the color parameters of the internal video buses.

INPUTCORR

Press the associated key to select the INPUT CORR submenu which serves tomodify the color parameters of the video inputs.




113

3.3.3 SETTING THE LAYER MODES

LAYER MODE

ME1 ME2 PP

Press the associated function key to switch over to Layer mode for the individualmixing levels.

In Layer mode, background A and background B become independent from eachother. Each signal is limited with a wipe pattern. The background is black.

The PVW path is used to create a B/W key signal which unites the currently activelayers.If, for instance, in the DSK a mixing level in Layer mode is selected as fillsignal, this key signal will automatically be used as key transition signal. The keyershould be switched to Linear.

NOTE FOR USING THE LAYER MODE

During the layer mode in the corresponding mixer level don’t use the following oper-ating functions:

Key PVW

Mask PVW

Chroma Key Cursor Adjustment

These functions switched off the layer mode temporary.




114

3.3.4 SETTING THE FADER CURVE

FADER CURVE

ME1 ME2 PP

LINEAR EXPON GAMMA

Press the associated function key to select the transition characteristics for the fad-ers. Each time you press this key, the following curve functions will appear in cycli-cal order:

• LINEAR transition on the basis of a linear function

• EXPON transition on the basis of an exponential function

• GAMMA transition on the basis of a gamma function

• S-EXP transition on the basis of an exponential gamma function

• S-GAM transition on the basis of a gamma exponential function

The selected curve function will be displayed in the menu below the mixing levelidentification.

GAMMA

LINEAR

S-EXP

EXPON

S-GAM




115

3.3.5 SETTING THE FADERS

FADER

ME1 ME2 PP

ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE

EXTRA

ACTIVE

Press the associated function key to enable or disable the fader of the individualmixing levels. The EXTRA fader cannot be disabled.The active status is indicated by black text on light background.

Example: ME1, PP, and EXTRA are active and ME2 is inactive.



3.4 Access menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

116

3.4 ACCESS MENU

The ACCESS menu serves to determine the access rights.

This comprises

• assignment of the control authority for the various electronics boxes within thenetwork

• setup and determination of the user rights (operator, system manager, configu-ration administrator)

• password entry to prevent unauthorized access.

Next to the softkeys, the menu contains a symbolic representation of the switcherwith all its functional units. If you select a functional unit, you permit the access tothe selected electronics box from the current control panel.




117

3.4.1 SELECTION OF THE ELECTRONICS BOX

SHOW E –BOX

If you press the associated function key, a window with a new key assignmentappears in the menu, listing all electronics boxes connected to the network. Thiswindow permits the selection of the desired electronics box in the network to whichthe control unit (device) is to have access.Next to the name, the list also indicates the type of the electronics box (DD20, DD30etc.).After the initial installation of the electronics box, the name of the devices must beentered via the SERVICE submenu (e.g. device=STUDIO 1).As an alternative, the name can also be entered with the Rename function in theDISK menu.

Press the associated function key to move the marker bar up or down in the list.

DESELPress the associated function key to cancel a previous selection.

SELECT Press the associated function key to select the electronics box marked with the bar.The name of the electronics box is then displayed below the SHOW E-BOX func-tion keys.




118

3.4.2 ENTERING NEW USERS AND USER ACCESS RIGHTS

USERS

If you press the associated function key, the USERS menu appears with a new keyassignment. This menu permits entering users or user groups with differing accessrights. Only users with system permission (PERMIT=SYSTEM) have access to thismenu.The unit is delivered with the user COMMON entered with highest access right(PERMIT=SYSTEM). The user COMMON cannot be deleted!

The menu field lists the logged-in users in a table that also shows the access rightin the Permit column and the existence of a password (yes/no) in the Password col-umn.

A maximum of 8 users (and/or user groups) can be entered.

PERMITPress the associated function key to give the user access to various control levels.Each time you press this key, the following options will appear in cyclical order:

SYSTEM Ssystem manager, has the same access rights as Con-fig and Operator users but can also enter users anddetermine their rights of access to the functional units ofthe switcher.

operating staff, has access to control functions

configuration management, has also access to the con-figuration in the INSTALL menu and its submenus.

Press the associated function key to move the marker bar up or down the list.New user names can be entered with the alphabetical keypad (Wipe panel) and thenumeric keypad. The cursor indicates the entry position in the entry field (editing

line).




119

USER ENTRY

ENTER DELETE

Press ENTER to store the added user.

Press DELETE if you want to delete the user selected with the marker bar from thelist.

BLANKPress the associated function key to enter a blank during the entry of the usernames.

RUBOUTPress the associated function key to delete the character left of the current cursorposition.

EXIT

Press the associated function key to return to the higher order ACCESS menu.




120

3.4.3 LOGIN OF A USER

USERPress the associated function key to select a user name already entered with theUSERS submenu. This is the first step to log in the new user in the system. Each

time the key is pressed, a new user name appears so that all registered users canbe scrolled through. The user name is indicated in the field above the USER soft-key.

LOGINPressing the associated function key enables the user whose user name wasselected with the USER softkey to log into the switcher system. For each user, aseparate data area will be opened automatically, which serves to store the user-specific switcher settings. If the user has protected his or her area against unautho-rized access with a password, a window appears in the menu, where the password(maximum 4 digits) must be entered.




121

3.4.4 ENTERING AND CHANGING A PASSWORD

CHANGE

PASSWD

If the associated function key is pressed, the PASSWD menu appears with a newkey assignment, where the current user can enter a password or change an exist-ing password. A password may be any number up to 4 digits (0 ... 9999) and isentered with the numeric keypad.Confirm the entry with the ENTER key of the numeric keypad.The access rightmust be proved by entering a system manager password.To avoid erroneous password entries, a second verification entry is required.

EXIT

Press the associated function key to leave the menu window.

NO

PASSWD Press the associated function key to delete an existing password.




122

3.4.5 ASSIGNMENT OF USER ACCESS RIGHTS TO THE ELECTRONICS BOX

ME1 ME2 PP –DSK OTHER ALL

If you press the associated function key, you assign special functional groups in thevideo electronics to the current control panel. In the menu, enabled functional unitsare light while disabled functional units are dark.The type of access is preselected with the MODE softkey.

Press the associated function keys to move from one functional unit to the next inorder to select individual units for the determination of access rights.

SELECT

Press the associated function key to establish the access to the functional unit ofthe switcher electronics that is selected with the cursor. The type of access is deter-mined with the MODE preselection. Thus the access right is assigned to the controlpanel (not to the user).




123

MODE

Press the associated function key to preselect various modes for the access to theindividual functional units of the switcher electronics. Each time you press this key,

the following modes will appear in cyclical order:

NONE black marking, access denied

SHARED hatched marking, access possible from several control units(devices)

EXCL bright marking, access exclusively from this control panel.

The MODE function applies to SELECT as well as to ME1, ME2, PP - DSK,OTHER, ALL.




125



3.5 Install menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

126

3.5 INSTALL MENU

The installation menu serves as higher order selection menu for the system instal-lation and configuration. From this menu, the submenus assigned to functionalgroups and components are selected (please refer to Menu Overview ).

3.5.1 SETTING THE SCREEN SAVER

Screen Saver

5 min

The screen saver switches off the display in order to avoid burn-ins when the con-trol panel is inactive for a given period. This period can be set with the arrow soft-keys.




127

30 –JUN –93 11:54:41

DATE DATESET

Press the associated function key to set the system clock of the switcher.

To set date and time, proceed as follows:

• Press SET.

The cursor will appear at the first position of the entry line.

• Press DATE ↑ and DATE ↓ until the desired date is reached.

• Press → .

Cursor moves to the next entry position.

• Repeat the above process until date and time have been set.

• Press SET.The entry is completed, the data are taken over by the computer and areupdated even when the switcher is switched off.



IDENT

INPUT


128

3.5.2 IDENT INPUT SUBMENU

Press the associated function key to return to the higher order INSTALL menu.

Press the associated key to select the IDENT INPUT submenu.

The IDENT INPUT menu serves to assign the video inputs to the individual keysof the source selection banks on the control panel and to define the abridgedsource names. For the individual (internal and external) signals, an entry field isprovided which can be accessed with the cursor keys of the menu. The abridgedsource name can then be entered with the alphabetical keypad (Wipe panel) andthe numeric keypad.

The entry fields are arranged as follows:

1st line INPUTS 1 - 82ndline INPUTS 9 - 163rd line INPUTS 17 - 244th line INPUTS 25 - 325th line INTERNAL (internal switcher signal sources such as Black,

BGD matte etc.




129

IDENTXBAR #

The source mnemonic codes from upstream crossbars can be transferred to theswitcher using the IDENT XBAR protocol. For this purpose a corresponding control

cable must be provided in addition to the video cable between switcher E – box andexternal crossbar (TVS, Mars, Venus ) and the protocol for the relevant port must beselected in the CONFIG EBOX menu. For further details please refer to Supple-ment 3 TVS Interface .

The mnemonic code transfer is enabled with the IDENT XBAR# softkey in theIDENT INPUT menu.For this purpose the desired switcher input must be selected with the cursor. Bypressing the IDENT XBAR# softkey a ”#” appears in the Ident line of the selectedsource. The desired output number of the external crossbar can be entered with thenumeric keypad.

EXTERNXBAR $

Which external Aux bus is to be assigned to the switcher inputs can be determinedwith the EXTERN XBAR$ softkey.For this purpose the desired switcher input must be selected with the cursor. Bypressing the EXTERN XBAR$ softkey a ”$” appears in the Ident line of the selectedsource. The desired output number of the external Aux bus can be entered with thenumeric keypad. A ”YES” is entered automatically for this Aux bus in the Prerouterline.

In order to delete an IDENT XBAR or EXTERN XBAR entry, move the cursor intothe entry field to be cleared, press theIDENT XBAR or EXTERN XBAR softkey andpress Clear (in the numeric keypad).After this operation the default input name appears in the entry field.

EXITPress the associated function key to return to the higher order INSTALL menu.




130

ASSIGN

OFF

Pressing the associated function key permits an optional assignment of the inputsignals to one or several keys of the source selection banks.

Each time you press this key you change the assignment in cyclical order between:

OFF, ME1, ME2, PP, AUX1 ... 6, DVE1,2, Vid Store, PVW

The active key bank is highlighted with a running light. Selecting a key in this bankwill assign the signal source marked with the cursor in the menu to this position.This status is indicated with a permanent light in the key. Press the key once more tocancel the assignment.

ASSIGN

ALLPressing the associated function key the same sources are assigned on all levels.

The ME1 key bank is highligted with a running light. Selecting a key in this bank willassign the signal source marked with the cursor in the menu to this position. Thisstatus is indicated with a permanent light in the key. Press the key once more tocancel the assignement.

SHOWXBAR

Pressing the associated function key switches the menu between ON and OFF.

– ON: Display the “#<no.>” and “$<no.>” for inputs which gettheir mnemonics using IDENT XBAR or EXTERN XBAR

– OFF: Display of these mnemonics

Press the associated function keys to move the cursor from field to field within the

entry mask, or from entry position to entry position within a field.

BLANKPress the associated function key to enter a blank in the source name entry.

RUBOUTPress the associated function key to delete the contents left of the current cursorposition.




132

EXIT


ASSIGNPress the associated function key to form ”couples” of fill and key signals. For thispurpose, select the desired fill source with the cursor keys in the menu. After youhave pressed the ASSIGN softkey, the available key bank is highlighted with a run-ning light.Press the desired key signal key to form the ”couple” and to enter the abridgedsource name into the entry field.

Press the associated function key to move the cursor from field to field in the entrymask. The active field is provided with a black background.




133

3.5.4 CONFIGURATION PANEL SUBMENU

PANEL E_BOX

CONFIGURATION

Press the associated key to select the CONFIG PANEL submenu.

The CONFIG PANEL menu serves to set system parameters for the control panelof the switcher. Some analog parameters to optimize operation are also set in theINSTALL menu.




134

LOWLIThe first digipot can be used to adjust the background brightness of the key lampsfor the inactive status in order to adapt the key lighting to the light conditions at thework place.

MOUSE The third digipot serves to adjust the sensitivity of the mouse (option).

T.BALL

The second digipot serves to adjust the sensitivity of the trackball. This is recom-mended if during masking in Paint mode the mask is painted too rough (i.e. withleaps).




135

ON

LOGO

On a DD20 or DD30 panel (where the LEDs and LED driver below the BTS logo onthe upstanding part are equipped!) it is now possible to select whether the BTS logo

illumination is OFF, ON or ON/OFF depending on the ON-AIR status of the mixer.

Prepared panels:

DD20: panel serial number 149 and higherDD30: panel serial number 140 and higher

KEYCLICK

KEYCLICK enables a short acoustical “Click” when a button is pushed.

Mode 1

TR –PVW

At end of transition with TRANS PREVIEW on, the PGM and PST Bus do not longerswitch.

Operation of TRANS PVW can be modified. New setting TR-PVW

“Mode 1” = compatible operation.TRANS PVW stays on and shows in endposition the finalimage on the PVW output.

“Mode 2” = TRANS PVW goes automatically to the begin of the transition

when reaching the endposition“Mode 3” = “One shot mode”.

TRANS PVW switches automatically off, when T-Bar goes toeither endposition.Note: Also when returning to the begin TRANS PVW isswitched off.Does not apply with LIMIT ON.

Note: Mode 2 and 3 behave as described when using the T – Bar forcontrolling the transition. AUTO transition behaves as beforeequivalent to Mode 1.

EXIT





136

CUTRIGHT

Press the respective function key to exchange the position of the AUTO and CUTkeys in the transition control panel. This function may be selected in the SETUP

of the switcher.

PGM/PSTGERMAN

Press the associated function key to exchange the position of the Program and Pre-set banks.In inactive status the Program or Background bank is above the Preset bank as isinternational custom.In active status the Program or Background bank is below the Preset bank as isgeneral practice in German TV broadcasting corporations.

SELECT% –BARS

If you press the associated function key, all bar graphs of the menus will includea percentage value indicating the current analog value. This indication only servesas a general guideline and does not show e.g. exact levels.

LOWLILOWLI

50%

inactive active

OR’DAUX

When ON, the on air indicators on the panel signal on air if the respective bus is onair OR a coupled (internal) AUX – BUS is on air.

When OFF, the on air indicators on the panel signal on air if theonly the respectivebus is on air.

AUTOMENU

Press the associated function key to select the AUTO MENU function. In active sta-tus the associated menu will be called automatically whenever a key is selected inthe various control panels of the desk. The automatic selection is always disabledwhen the EXTRA menu is selected.In inactive status the individual menus can be selected with the associated keys

if necessary.




137

AUTOBAR

As from software version “F”, when analogue values are changed, a window can bedisplayed in the selected menu which shows the various settings in a bar graph.

This mode can be enabled or disabled by pressing the softkey AUTO BAR.For DD20 and DD 30 switchers, the window can be switched off by pressing Exit(on the right hand side below the display).

PORTIf the associated function key is pressed, an additional selection field appearswhere the function of the PORT connector at the control panel can be defined. Cur-rently the following port protocols are available:

- AUX / UMD -MPK- AUX-MPK



8-CHARUMDS

c


138

CONNECTION OF THE STATUS DISPLAYS RP 1/2 UMD

In addition to the AUX panels, status displays (UMDs) can be connected to the MPKbus. Since maximally 32 devices can be operated at the MPK bus, the number of

the connectable UMDs depends on the number of the connected AUX panels.

M E 2 K E Y 1RP 1 UMD 3A

BTS

V T R 3 C A M 1RP 2 UMD 3A

BTS

M E 2 = i t

M E 2 = i t

RS232C GPI RS485 ADDRESS

DIAGNOSTIC MPK BUS

POWER

85 - 265 V

TEST

TEST

Connection to the MPK bus is made in the same way as for the AUX panels. Powersupply can be universally with line voltages of 85 V ... 265 V AC. The respectiveuse of the UMDs can be adjusted with the two rotary switches ADDRESS on theterminal panel.Each rotary switch has t he hexadecimal range 0 ... F. See the table below.

AUX CONTROL PANELMPK




RPD 10

UMDMPK

UMDMPK

UMDMPK

UMDMPK

4x AUX PANEL max 28x UMD

Number of UMD = 32 – Number of AUX-Panel




139

In this application, the following addesses are used:

AddressH L

DisplayLeft display RP 2 UMD

DisplayDisplay RP 1 UMDright display RP 2 UMD

Note

0 0 – Input 1 1)

0 1 Input 1 Input 2

0 2 Input 2 Input 3

⇓ ⇓ ⇓

0 F Input 15 Input 16

1 0 Input 16 Input 17

⇓ ⇓ ⇓

1 F Input 31 Input 32

2 2 – Output ME1 2)

2 3 Output ME1 Output ME2 2 4 Output ME2 Output MAIN

2 5 – PVW ME1 3)

2 6 PVW ME1 PVW ME2

2 7 PVW ME2 PVW PP=PST=MAIN PVW

2 8 PVW PP CLEAN FEED 4)

2 9 CLEAN FEED PVW BUS 5)

2 A PVW BUS Output DP 6)

2 B – AUX1 7)

2 C AUX1 AUX2 2 D AUX2 AUX3

2 E AUX3 AUX4

2 F AUX4 AUX5

3 0 AUX5 AUX6

3 1 DVE1 KEY DVE1 VIDEO 8)

3 2 DVE1 VIDEO DVE1 KEY

3 3 DVE2 KEY DVE2 VIDEO

3 4 DVE2 VIDEO DVE2 KEY

Attention: Other addresses are not admitted. Each address must beadjusted at one UMD only!




140

The presentation on the display is mostly made with 4 characters. At the UMDsfor CLEAN FEED and for the DVEs, alternatively an 8 – character display can beselected.Adjustment is made via the softkey ”8 –CHAR UMD’s” in the menu Config Panelof the mixer.

Notes to the address adjustment:

1) The displays for the 32 inputs show the 4 – digit source name.

2) The displays for the three outputs can show the following:a) The source name of the input being visible in the output picture, if

it is the only picture component,

b) ”....”, when a mixed picture is at the output,c) ”FTB”, when the output has been faded to black with thefade-to-black function.

3) The displays for the PVW ME1 / ME2 / PP Preview can show the following:a) ”PROG”, when no Preview is selected,b) ”AKAx”, when the cursor for Auto – Chroma – Key – Adjustment is

selected,c) the states of the next transition keys are displayed with graphical

symbols (on/off).

e.g. ” _ _ ” In this case: NXT BGD A = off,

NXT BGD B = on,NXT KEY 1 = off,

NXT KEY 2 = on

This preview mode is displayed when Look – Ahead – Previewis switched on.

d) ”TRAN”, when Transition Preview is selected.e) ”KEYx”, when Key Preview is selected (Video: Key to background)f) ”keyx”, when Key Preview is selected (Video: pure key signal (SW))g) ”MSKx”, when Mask Preview is selectedh) 4 – digit source name of the DSK2, when PP – Preview = DUAL or CASC

is selected.x = 1 or 2 for ME1,

4 or 5 for ME27 or 8 for PP




141

4) The Clean Feed display shows in the 4 – character mode ”CLEA” and in the8character mode ”CLEAN FD”.

5) The display of the Preview AUX output shows the 4 – digit source name of theselected input.

6) The display of the DP output shows the 4 – digit source name of the selectedDSK1 input when PP – Preview = DUAL or CASC.In the other cases: ”####” (no meaning).

7) The displays for the 6 AUX outputs show the 4 – digit source name of the se-lected input.

8) The displays for the 4 DVE outputs can show the following:

a) The 4 – digit source name of the selected inputb) ”1PST”, ”1PGM”, ”1 K1”, ”1 K2”, ”2PST”, ”2PGM ”, ”2 K2”, ”PPST”,

”PPGM”, ”P K1”, ”P K2” for the selected ME output in the4 – character mode.

c) ”ME1 PST”, ”ME1 PGM”, ”ME1 KEY1”, ”ME1 KEY2”, ”ME2 PST”,”ME2 PGM”, ”ME2 KEY1”, ”ME2 KEY2”, ”PP PST”, ”PP PGM”,

”PP KEY1”, ”PP

- MON IDENT/I- MON IDENT/B- AUX-MPK

The items will be updated gradually.

Each time you press this key, these options will appear in cyclical order.




142

3.5.4.1 User programmable keys

From software version ”H-plus” or ”I”, the mixers DD10, DD20 and DD30 includethe function ”user programmable keys – UPK” which enables direct control of a

connected device (e.g. DVE) from the Transition panel by generating GPO trigger-ing pulses.

The keys Lim on and Lim set are available for control. Depending on the applica-tion, they can be programmed in the new software version in the menu ConfigPanel.

Additionally, it is possible to supply automatically a GPO triggering pulse from theTransition panel which is generated when actuating the keys Cut or Auto.

BGDKey Key

Limit

Limit

BLK TransTrans

CutAuto

set

on

1 2

preset PVWdur

WP 1 MIX WP 2

1 2 3 4

Transition

On On

Over Over

Transition Type

Add DVE MixWipe

1Wipe

2

UPKs

Example: DD10 Transition panel




143

Menu Config Panel

Menu DD20

Menu DD30

Softkey → ← Movement of the cursor within the table.

Softkey CMD↑ CMD↓ In the field marked with the cursor, each time the key is pressed, switchover is madeto the next or previous programming version. The indicated version correspondsto the respective key function.

The following functions can be assigned to the two keys:

– Limit set/on (default) – Trigger GPO1

: – Trigger GPO8 – Enable GPO Trigger – Enable DVE1 shotbox – Enable DVE2 shotbox

When one of the keys is programmed on Enable GPO Trigger, the Auto key is usedto additionally trigger the GPO2, and the Cut key to additionally trigger the GPO3.

Not for ”Enable DVEx shotbox”:

” Enable DVEx shotbox ” can be switched on by pushing the programmed button.Switching OFF is done by pushing a Next Transition button.When ON, the transition control field serves as DVE shotbox, i. e. all lamps and displays are switched-off, the fader is inactive. The AUTO and CUT button have diffe- ren functions:

- AUTO triggers GPO2 in DVE1 shotbox mode

- CUT triggers GPO3 in DVE1 shotbox mode

- AUTO triggers GPO4 in DVE2 shotbox mode

- CUT triggers GPO5 in DVE1 shotbox mode

As a side effect the keyers control field is delegated to key1.




144

Softkey RESET The field marked with the cursor, is reset to the default function. Default functionof the upper key is Lim set, and of the lower key Lim on.

Softkey RST ALL All keys are reset to the default function.




146

REPLASYNC

In the REPL ASYNC = ON mode, the switcher monitors the signals to be keyed.For asynchronous signals a hard cut is performed at the end of the transition.

AUTOPVW

Press the associated function key to select the Auto PVW function.In active status the PVW bus will always follow the selected Preview.

KEYMEMORY

The key memory can store a complete key adjustment for any input of the mixer.

These are the following parameters (marked in the figure with * ):

Key Type (Lin, Lum, Chr, Chr with FGD Fade)

Border (Shadow, Drop, Outline, ... )

Border Position, Border Opacity

Key Invert

Mask on, Mask Source (Box, Pattern, ...), Box Mask (right/left/top/bottom),

Mask Bus Clip/Gain

Fill Matte/Bus

Opacity

Clip, Gain

Chroma Key Color and Selectivity

Adjustments of Fill Matte and Border Matte




147

The following parameters are not stored:

Synthetic Key Sources (Mask Key, Pattern Key)

Key Over

Key PVW

Cursor/Auto

Source Key Bus / Coupl / Split Key

The source of the Mask Bus

Adjustment of the SETUP function KEY MEMORY = ON

The key parameters are stored into the key memory,

when another key source is selected on the key bus,

when the momentarily used key source is selected again on the key bus.

The key parameters of a key source stored in the key memory are called

when switch-over is made to this key source on the key bus,

when a synthetic key source (Mask Key, Pattern Key) is disabled by pressingthe key once more.

If an adjustment already stored for the same source should be restored during akey adjustment, a synthetic source (Mask Key, Pattern Key) has to be switched onand switched off with the same key.

NOTE – If only the key crossbar is switched over with EXTRA, neither a storage of theformer key state nor a call of the new key state is made.

– If the COUPL mode is selected or the key bus is selected as a source, the keysource is automatically selected when selecting the fill signal, thus calling thestored adjustment of the source signal.

– If the KEY SPLIT mode is selected, the key source signal can be selected onthe key bus, thus calling the stored adjustment.

– For each input, only one adjustment can be stored. If an input is used for severalkeyers in a different way, each procedure described under ”Storing”, effects astorage into the key memory. The last storage procedure will be the contentsfor this input in the key memory.

Condition

Storing into the key memory

Calling from the key memory

Restoring from the key memory




148

VERTTRANSP

Press the associated function key to switsch over between ON and OFF.IN OFF position the V-gap and H-gap is replaced by black and the mixer-internal

sync frame is added.In ON position the information contained in the V-gap (VITS, videotext etc.) arekept.

DSK DRP

OFF

Automatic switch-off of DSK1 and/or 2.With SETUP item DSK DROP the user can select whether a visible DSK will beswitched off when a PP PGM-bus button is pushed.

DSK DROP Function

OFF DSK DROP inactive: DSKs remain unchanged



BOTH Both DSKs are switched off

FLDDOM

ANY

Press the associated function key to switch over between ANY, FIELD1 andFIELD2.The setting concerns the switching of the crosspoints on all busses (without ExtAnz), the start of auto transitions, switching with CUT and the recalling of snapshotsand timelines.In position ANY switching occurs at the beginning of the next frame.In position FIELD1/2 switching or starting occurs before the corresponding field.




149

COUPLED TO

AUX1

ME1BGD A

AUX2

ME1BGD B

AUX3

ME1FILL 1

AUX4

ME1FILL 2

AUX5 AUX6

Press the associated function key to couple the selection on the Aux matrices withthe other matrices, i.e. when a picture source is selected on one of the matrices theAux bus is selected as well. If you press the key again, a new window will appearin the menu which enables you to select the matrix with which the respective Auxbus is to be coupled.

PORT1 PORT2 PORT3

EDIT1GVG100

DVEPRIZM

If you press the associated function key, an additional selection field appears whichpermits defining the functions of the PORT connectors at the E-box. Currently thefollowing port protocols are available.

- EDIT GVG200o- AUDIO MASTER- DVE A53D

- DVE PRIZM- DVE ADO- EDIT1 GVG100- EDIT2 GVG100- IDENT TVS- DVE CHARIS- DVE VTR- EDIT GVG200e- DVE DPM

The items will be updated gradually.Each time you press the key the indication in the respective active field will change

in cyclical order.




150

GENLOCK ADJUSTMENT

From software version ”G”, the mixers include the possibility to perform the genlockadjustment of the individual input sources in Installation menu Config E-Box.

When adjusting the genlock phase, all sources have to be successively checked

for their timing by switching up on the bus Video store.

To adjust the genlock phase, select the softkey Config E-Box in the Install menu.The following display is represented:

With controller Genlock, the phase relation of the mixer can be shifted by – 1 lineup to +2 lines in comparison with the genlock reference signal.The display TIMING serves for checking the timing of the sources.The bar diagram arranged horizontally under the TIMING field displays the timingof the source to the mixer that is selected on bus Video store.




151

The display can give the following informations:

No input signal in theselected input.

Input signal does not lie inarea of the auto phasers.

Input signal IN03 lies 17.7 µs be-fore the earliest mixer input.

The header line TIMING displays the source selected on bus Video store with thedefined source name with the current status (e.g. IN03: no signal).The bar diagram under the header line displays the timing of the sources in the areaof the auto phaser. Both arrows mark the area in which the phase relation of thesources can correctly be set for all mixer buses. In the correct timing range, thebar is light. A dark bar indicates that the source does not lie in the valid area. Thiscan also happen when the display is between the arrows!

Attention: At DD5 and DD10, the mode of representation of the menu monitor can be changed (e.g. to inverse representation) by means of switch T4 on the control panel controller. Thus the bar colors and also all other softkeys can be displayed in the menu in an inverted way.

The right arrow marks the earliest mixer input (latest timing of the sources). Theleft arrow marks the earliest timing of the sources.

When adjusting the genlock phase, switching procedures in the genlock effectagain a running in of the H phase. This is indicated in the bar diagram as bounces.In this case, the run-in procedure has to be waited for.




152

3.5.6 SERVICE SUBMENU

SERVICE

Press the associated key to select the SERVICE submenu. For a more comprehen-sive description please refer to SERVICE menu in the service manual of theswitcher.

EXIT HOLD CTR –C CTR –Z SPACE : RUBOUT ENTER

D30 Service Menu

device: STUDIO 1

user: COMMON

software version [V]

integrated error diagnosis [I]

DICMAC direct control and memory access [D]

halt normal operation [H]

KERMIT file transfer [K]

change KERMIT user [U]

change device name [N]

show network [S]




153

3.5.7 DIAGNOSIS SUBMENU

DIAGN

Press the associated key to select the DIAGN menu.

The diagnostics submenu serves for the output of error messages. The error mes-sages are listed in the menu in separate windows according to error sources, i.e.control panel (panel) and electronics box (E-box).In the representation of the errors, error states (S) are distinguished from errorevents (E). The errors in the list are marked accordingly. A defective p.c. board inthe E-box, for instance, will be indicated as an error state. The message (e.g. ”S RY1917”) continues until the fault is remedied. Error events (e.g. ”E watchdog reset”)are stored and deleted only after a specific intervention of the user.

The diagnostics menu permits the indication of many different error messages. Allerror states are indicated and updated continuously, while only the last 16 errorevents are indicated. These 16 error messages are lost when the switcher isswitched off.




154

EXIT

Press the associated function key to return from the DIAGN menu to the higherorder INSTALL menu.

Press the associated function key to page up within the list of panel or E-box errormessages.

Press the associated function key to page down within the list of panel or E-boxerror messages.

DELETEEVENTS

Press the associated function key to delete error events from the list of panel orE-box error messages.




155

POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGES IN THE DIAGNOSTICS MENU

No. Error messages Source of error

01 watchdog reset

02 V missing

03 V too fast

04 V too slow

05 main display controller Control deskE-Box

06 file contents lost: FILE NAME

E-Box

07 CHEAPERNET interface

08 CHEAPERNET cabling

09 CHEAPERNET send failed

10 low battery voltage

11 too many devices at CHEAPERNET

12 button display controller

13 no CHEAPERNET communication

14 realtime clockControl desk

15

Control deskE-Box

16 V-PLL not locked

17 power supply I

18 power supply II

19 too many panels

20 port: no communication

21 port: transmitter defekt

22 port: polled tributary busy

23 port: network information lost24 port: protokol error

Control desk

25 port: system service error received

Control deskE-Box

26 port: destin. tributary unavailable

27 port: communication distorted

28 port: common error mess. received

29 port: network too large




156


30 port2: no communication

31 port2: transmitter defekt

32 port2: polled tributary busy

33 port2: network information lost

34 port2: protokol error

35 port2: system service error receivedE-Box

36 port2: destin. tributary unavailable

37 port2: communication distorted

38 port2: common error mess. received

39 port2: network too large

40 port3: no communication

41 port3: transmitter defekt

42 port3: polled tributary busy

43 port3: network information lost

44 port3: protocol error

45 port3: system service error receivedE-Box

46 port3: destin. tributary unavailable

47 port3: communication distorted

48 port3: common error mess. received

49 port3: network too large

50 DUART 1

51 Interrupt 3

52 EPROM checksum bank x/y

53 RAM

54 DUARD 2 Control desk

55 Interrupt 2

Control deskE-Box

56 I/O to boards

57 too many foreign devices

58 Memory Disk

59 file contents lost: Disk

60 Input Proc.1

61 Input Proc.2

E-Box




157


62 Input Proc

63 ME Proc.1

64 ME Proc.2

65 ME Proc.3

66 ME ProcE-Box

67 Key Proc

68 Key Proc.1

69 Key Proc.2

70 Key Proc.3

71 Wipe Proc

72 Wipe Proc.1

73 Wipe Proc.2

74 Wipe Proc.3

75 Out ProcE-Box

76 low – 5V

77 Genlock ref.

78 Bankload

79 Clock

80 V-proc

81 Field Puls

82 Vert. Puls

83 H-Input Puls

84 H-F Puls

85 H-S PulsE-Box

86 H- P Puls

87 H-Out Puls

88 H-Aux Puls

89 + Power supply failed!

90 – Power supply failed!

91 read/write to RM1923 failed!E-Box

92 F-Pulse missing

108 slave processor not loaded



FADER

ADJ


158

3.5.7.1 FADER ADJUST

By pressing the FADER ADJ softkey, a routine for the adjustment of the switchersfaders is triggered.In this process, the user is asked to move all faders first to the bottom and then tothe top limit position.

Example:




159

3.5.8 AUX PANELS SUBMENU

AUX

Press the associated key to select the AUX PANELS submenu.

For the switchers DD5, DD10, DD20 and DD30 , two types of AUX panels are avail-able. Type CP-300 with 24 source selection keys and six bus delegation keys, andtype CP-330 with 48 source selection keys and six bus delegation keys.

In addition to the AUX panels, two types of status displays (UMDs) can be con-nected to the same control bus. Type RP 1 UMD includes a display with eight char-acters and type RP 2 UMD includes two displays with eight characters.

Since maximally 32 devices can be operated at the MPK bus, the number of the

connectable UMDs depends on the num ber of the installed AUX panels.

Number of UMD = 32 – number of AUX panels

The bus delegation keys can be assigned in menu AUX Panels to all buses. Forthis purpose, the mixer types DD5 and DD10 require the connection of a menumonitor.

As default, the bus delegation keys are assigned to the AUX buses AUX1 to AUX6.Not all of the smaller mixer types have these buses.

AUX delegation




161

The assignment of the video signals to the keys of the AUX control panels CP-330 and CP-300 cannot be changed, however, it depends on the electronics box se-lected at the control panel. For DD20 and DD30 , only CP-330 (with 48 sourceselection keys) should be used, in order to be able to select all signals. For DD10 and DD5 , both panels can be used. The lower row of CP-300 (keys 24 .. 47) has

the same assignment as the upper one.

KeyDD20 and DD30Input orinternal signal

KeyDD5 and DD10Input orinternal signal

0 Black 0 Black

1 IN 01 1 IN 01

⇓ ⇓ ⇓ ⇓

32 IN 32 16 IN 16

33 COL1 17 COL

34 COL2 18 VIDEO STORE

35 VIDEO STORE 19 CLEAN

36 MONT PROC 1 20 PVW

37 MONT PROC 2 21 PGM

38 ME1 22 Black

39 ME2 23 Black

40 PP (= PGM) 24 Black

41 PVW ME1 25 IN 01

42 PVW ME2 ⇓ ⇓

43 PVW PP 40 IN 16

44 ME1 KEY 41 COL

45 ME2 KEY 42 VIDEO STORE

46 CLEAN 43 CLEAN

47 Black 44 PVW

45 PGM

46 Black

47 Black

In case of delegation the AUX panels to external crossbars (Ext Aux 1...6) the fol-lowing assignment is valid:

Key Signal

0 Input 0 of external crossbar 1 Input 1 of external crossbar

47 Input 47 of external crossbar

AUX assignment for internal busse

AUX assignment for externalAUX busses




162

Each master control panel RPD-xx allows connection of up to four AUX panels tothe serial port (RS-422). Previously, the address has to be adjusted at each AUXpanel, adjusting at each of the four AUX panels another address.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove on the rear of the panel the small cover cap, revealing a DIP switchmodule with 8 switches.

2. Adjust the DIP switches 1 to 8 as follows:(0 means switch OFF = downwards, 1 means switch ON = upwards)

Schalter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81. Panel 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12. Panel 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Is applicable up to3. Panel 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 software DS0041L4. Panel 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

From software version ”DS0011G” which replaces the under –monitor dis-plays, the switches have to be set as follows:

Schalter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81. Panel 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 12. Panel 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 13. Panel 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 14. Panel 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

3. Fasten the cover cap.

4. Connect the panels among each other and with the serial port of the mastercontrol panel. For this purpose, a 9-wire cable with 9-pin Sub-D connectors isrequired (connected) by means of which the sockets MPK of the AUX panelsand the serial port of the master control panel are connected.

AUX-CPMPK

AUX-CPMPK

AUX-CPMPK

AUX-CPMPK

RPD 10

5. Apply 5V DC to the AUX panels.

6. Select the protocol AUX / UMD in the SETUP of the master control panel atPORTP.

Installation




163

3.5.9 GPI SUBMENU

GPI

Press the associated key to select the GPI submenu.

Press the associated key to select the GPI submenu.The GPI submenu serves forthe definition of the signal parameters for the GPI inputs and GPI outputs 1...8. Anentry field is provided for the individual signals that can be accessed with the cursorkeys.In the Ident line, an abridged symbolic name of the respective input and output canbe entered. Default settings are GPO1...8 and GPI1...8. The alphabetical keypadin the Wipe panel and the numeric keypad in the EXTRA panel can be used to

change the names.In the Preroll line, a preroll time (in fields) can be entered, for instance, to switcha VTR with a defined run-up time. The time value is entered with the numeric key-pad in the EXTRA panel.The Attach function offers a major advantage. If you select a fixed source in theAttached to line and also select the Auto function in the GPI OUT menu, theassociated GPI signal is always set with a defined preroll time as soon as thesource is faded-in whenever the fixed source is selected on one of the buses. Thisautomatic function is particularly helpful with several VTRs with different prerolltimes.




164

EXIT


ATTACHPress the associated function key to assign a fixed video source to the GPI channelmarked with the cursor. For this purpose, the keys of the Background bus are high-lighted with a running light. Select one of these keys to link the associated videosource permanently with the GPI channel. The source identification is shown in theentry field.

PREROLLPress the associated function key to enter a preroll time in fields. The time can beentered with the numeric keypad in the EXTRA panel.

PULSEPress the associated function key to define the signal to be sent (GPI OUT) as apulse signal. In this case, P is entered in the Pulse/Static line.

STATICPress the associated function key to define the signal to be sent (GPI OUT) as astatic signal. In this case, S is entered in the Pulse/Static line.

DURAT.Press the associated function key to set the pulse duration (P status) of the signal tobe sent (GPI OUT). After you have pressed this key, a running light in the numerickeypad prompts the entry of a numeric value:

Number of fields = max. 254 = 5 seconds.

Press the associated function key to determine whether the positive or negativeedge of the arriving signal (GPI IN) is to be evaluated. The corresponding symbolfor positive or negative pulse edge is entered in the Edge line.




165

TRIGGERPress the associated function key to simulate GPI IN and GPI OUT for testing orinstallation purposes. The channel whose entry field is marked with the cursor will

be triggered.

Press the associated function key to move the cursor from field to field within theentry mask. The active field is provided with a black background.

BLANKPress the associated function key to enter a blank during the source name entry

(Ident).

RUBOUTPress the associated function key to delete the contents left of the current cursorposition.




166

3.5.10 SUB-MENU EXT AUX

RS –422 router interface with BTS –ASCII –Protocol

3.5.10.1 General

The RS – 422 router interface permits the control of external BTS crossbars such asMars , Venus or TVS .

The following applications are conceivable:

Switching of an emergency crossbar

Connection to upstream crossbars

External Aux buses

An external crossbar can be controlled from the switcher if the crossbar features a

corresponding controller such as:

Mars: CE – 300 controllerVenus: SC – 400 controllerTVS: CE – 2200 controller

Control is also possible with the BTS control system Jupiter provided this isequipped with the VM – 3000 controller.

In addition, the corresponding video and control wiring must be provided. TheROUTER INTERFACE protocol for the XBAR port is loaded by the switcher as astandard and need not be selected separately.The following pages contain more detailed information on wiring and control. The

instruction set for the BTS – ASCII protocol is defined in BCS – 3000 ASCII computer interface protocol documentation .

The transfer of the source mnemonic codes from upstream crossbars to theswitcher does not belong to the router interface but is possible with the IDENTXBAR protocol which can be selected in the CONFIG PANEL installation sub – menu.




167

3.5.10.2 Menu settings

In order to adapt the system to the desired environment and to configure it for exter-nal crossbars, several menus are available in the switcher. The EXTERN AUXmenu is selected by pressing the EXTERN AUX softkey in the INSTALLATIONmenu.

The EXTERN AUX menu serves as a reference table for the source designations ofthe signals on the external crossbar. Standard sources have the designation PRxx(PreRouter xx).The source designations entered in this table are indicated in the displays abovethe Aux key bank when one of the six external crossbar outputs is selected.

The table can be edited with the cursor softkeys, the alphabetical keyboard and thenumeric keypad which permits entering user specific source designations.

Press the EXIT softkey to return to the higher – order INSTALLATION menu.

Press the CONFIG softkey to select a further menu for the entry of the configurationparameters.




168

The CONFIG menu permits setting the configuration parameters for externalcrossbars.

The menu is divided into two parts.

active operation active crossbar controlIn this case an external crossbar output (max. 6) canbe switched immediately upstream of the switcheroperation. Operation of the external crossbar as withAux bus. The delegation to external buses is madewith the EXT AUX key.

passive operation passive crossbar controlIn this case an external crossbar output (max. 6) iscoupled to one of the internal crossbar buses of theswitcher.

The OUT XBAR line permits entering the desired output number of the externalcrossbar to be switched by the external Aux bus.Admissible output numbers are 0 ... 127.

The Prerouter line serves to indicate with ”Yes/No” if the corresponding output of

the external crossbar is selected as source in the IDENT INPUT menu. For furtherdetails please refer to Ident Input menu .

The Coupled to line permits entering an internal switcher bus. In this case theexternal crossbar is coupled to an internal switcher bus. Repeated pressing of theCOUPLE softkey scrolls through the various buses available in the switcher.

Note: In active operation and enabled ” coupling ” only the external crossbar is coupled. The direct switching of sources on the external crossbar with separate crossbar control panel does not have any effect on the internal switcher buses.




169

XBAR –Ident:

The source mnemonic codes from upstream crossbars can be transferred to theswitcher using the IDENT XBAR protocol. For this purpose a corresponding controlcable must be provided in addition to the video cable between switcher E – box andexternal crossbar (TVS, Mars, Venus ) and the protocol for the relevant port must beselected in the CONFIG EBOX menu. For further details please refer to Supple-ment 3 TVS Interface .

The mnemonic code transfer is enabled with the IDENT XBAR# softkey in theIDENT INPUT menu.For this purpose the desired switcher input must be selected with the cursor. Bypressing the IDENT XBAR# softkey a ”#” appears in the Ident line of the selectedsource. The desired output number of the external crossbar can be entered with the

numeric keypad.

Extern XBAR:

Which external Aux bus is to be assigned to the switcher inputs can be determinedwith the EXTERN XBAR$ softkey.For this purpose the desired switcher input must be selected with the cursor. Bypressing the EXTERN XBAR$ softkey a ”$” appears in the Ident line of the selectedsource. The desired output number of the external Aux bus can be entered with thenumeric keypad. A ”YES” is entered automatically for this Aux bus in the Prerouterline.

In order to delete an IDENT XBAR or EXTERN XBAR entry, move the cursor intothe entry field to be cleared, press theIDENT XBAR or EXTERN XBAR softkey andpress Clear (in the numeric keypad).After this operation the default input name appears in the entry field.




170

00

01

02

45

46

27

VENUS

SD Router

Inputs

01

02

30

31

32

DIAMOND DIGITAL

Switcher

SC-400

PortXBAR

Hinweis: Keine Tally-Signalisierung über den Pre-Router

Note: No tally lighting via pre-router

PortCONFIG

Basic diagram for pre-routing

RS-422(gekreuzte Leitungen,crossed wires)




171

00

01

02

21

22

23

MARSSD Router

Inputs

01

02

30

31

32

DIAMOND DIGITAL

Switcher

CE-300

PortXBAR

Hinweis: Keine Tally-Signalisierung über den Pre-Router

Note: No tally lighting via pre-router

PortCONFIG

Basic diagram for pre-routing

RS-422(gekreuzte Leitungen,crossed wires)24 x 8




172

BLACK32

01

30

SD Router

Inputs

01

02

31

32

DIAMOND DIGITAL

Switcher

SC-400

PortXBAR

Hinweis: Keine Tally-Signalisierung über den Parallel-Pouter

Note: No tally lighting via parallel-router

PortCONFIG

Basic diagram for parallel routing

RS-422(gekreuzte Leitungen,crossed wires)

CE-300

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

.

.

.

.

31

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Outputs

PGM ME1 CLEAN....

not assignet

not assignet

PRM ME1

PGM ME2

PGM PP

PVW ME1

PVW ME2

PVW PPClean feed

DistributionAmplifiers

8 Bus outputssimilar to the internalmixer buses

00




173

00

01

02

31

32

More

VENUSSD Router

Inputs

01

02

30

31

32

DIAMOND DIGITALSwitcher EBox

VM-3000

Note: The MI-3040 is hooked-up directly to the VM-3000 by a 9-pin serial cable and its

relays and opto-isolators are defined by software in the configuration editor.

Online name transfer from routing system into Diamond switcher

DA

DA

DA

DA

DA

DA

.

.

.

. ....

.

.

.

.

Signal routingto PVW monitors

. . . .

. . . .

RS-422

Port 1/2/3 Tally

Inputs

RS-422 cable for name transfer

tomonitortally

.

.

.

.

Tally

Distrib.

RLW...

Tally

Logic

MI-3040

Tallycontactsout

DIAMOND DIGITALControl panel

PVW monitors

UMDs



3.6 Disk / File menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

177

The highest level in the directory structure is the DEVICE level. Here all devicesconnected to the network (PANELS, E-BOX) are indicated. You can return to thishighest level from any place within the directory hierarchy simply by pressing theDEVICE softkey (F19).

On the lower levels the files of the individual devices are stored (FILE level). Thedirectory structure is fixed. The only directory that can be changed is DISK in thecontrol panel (DISK level).

Within the directory there are three different types of files. They are identified in theUSER columns of the directory window.

1. USER-TYPE = [#] SHARED

This type of file is available only once and is used by all users.

2. USER-TYPE = [USER-name]

These files exist separately for each user (maximum 8). If files of this type are in

the directory, a new USER softkey will appear below F20 which serves to scrollthrough the individual files arranged by users (toggle mode).

3. USER-TYPE = [USER-name]

Files of this type are assigned to a given user on a fixed basis. These are ”per-sonal” files (e.g. EXTRA, DISK) and cannot be toggled with the USER key.




178

3.6.4 STANDARD FILES IN FILE MENU

The following standard files are indicated in the FILE menu. Depending on theaccess rights of the logged-in user (see table) there are different possibilities.

Files in the electronics box

File(Type)

Contents

ACCESS(shared)

User table with name, access right andpassword.

Logged-in user with assigned functionalunits of all control panels.

CONF-EB(shared)

All basic video settings of the E-BOX(16/9 - 3/4, Round 8bit, Genlock Phase,Col Limiter).

Selected port protocols.

Preselections by the users(Aux Couple, Auto PVW, GPI, TVS, pre-matrix DVE).

COUPLE(user)

Key/Fill-Signalpaare

EXTRA(shared)

Contains all snapshots and timelines ofall users.As EXTRA is a directory file, the individ-

ual snapshots and timelines are directlyaccessible.Each snapshot and each timelinebelong to a user.

IDENT(user)

Table of the symbolic names for thevideo and key inputs.

MARCO-EB(shared)

Table of the symbolic names for thevideo and key inputs.




179

Continue table

File(Type)

Contents

MATR-TVS(shared)

Conversion table for the input and out-put numbers of a TVS matrix which isused for monitor switch-overs of theswitcher input signals according to theswitcher file ASSIGN.

PATT-USR(user)

Data of the user wipe patterns includingthe modifications.

STATE-EB(user)

Data on the current switcher status(matrices, transition, wipe generator,key processor, mask generator (withoutPaintMask), matte generator, PVWselection, GPI assignment and activa-tion, EXTRA Define Memo).

TEXTURES(shared)

Patterns for color background.

Access rights

User Permit

File SYSTEM CONFIG OPERATOR

ACCESSCONF-EBCOUPLEEXTRAIDENTMACRO-EBMATR-TVSPATT-USSTATE-EBTEXTURES




180

Files in the control panel

File(Type)

Contents

ASSIGN(user)

Assignment table of matrix keys on thecontrol panel to the inputs of the elec-tronics box.

DISK(sharedoder User)

Contents of the memory disk in directo-ries. Access to individual files possible.

CONF-PA(shared)

Data of all available functions in theCONFIG PANEL menu and the func-tions LCD, LOWLI, MOUSE and T.BALLin the INSTALL menu.

MARCO-PA

(shared)

Contains the macros defined in

DICMAC.

STATE-PA(user)

Data of the current control panel status(menu, bus delegation, trackball and/ormouse lock, fader assignment based onselection in ACCESS menu).

Access rights

User Permit

File SYSTEM CONFIG OPERATOR

ASSIGNDISKCONF-PAMACRO-PASTATE-PA




181

3.6.5 CONTENTS OF DIRECTORY WINDOWS

Device level (Example)

1 2 3 5 6 4

The directory window contains the following information:

1 Marking symbol ” > ” : indicates the last device selection.

2 Device name: can be freely selected by the customer.

3 Device type: indicates the respective type of BTS device (e.g. diamond pan = Diamondcontrol panel, diamond box = Diamond electronics box).

4 Address: Cheapernet address, is automatically determined when the system isstarted.

5 Current devices: the currently operated control panel is identified in this column as ”me”.Thecurrently selected electronics box is identified as ”my box”.

6 VERS: indicates the software version of the respective device.




182

File / directory level (Example)

1 2 3 5 6 4

The directory window contains the following information:

1 Marking symbol ” > ” : indicates the last file or directory selection

2 Device name: name of file or directory

3 User: User column

[#] = shared; only one file of this type is availableand is used by all users.

[user-name] = file available for each user (max. 8) or ”per-sonal” file

4 Typ: identification of directories and origin of data files:

DIR = directories that can be selectedALD = Auto Load Directory

5 Date: for internal files, the date when the menu was selected; for DISK and

EXTRA files, the last date of storing.

6 Time: time when the menu was selected.

7 *** TO UPPER DIR / ALL FILES ***: returning to the higher order directory and selection when you copy orerase directories.




183

3.6.6 SOFTKEYS FOR MENU CONTROL

The FILE menu contains different softkeys depending on the selected directorylevel (device, file, and disk level). The current directory window is highlighted with a

bar. On the disk and file level, further windows above the directory windows containthe following information:

First line: – device name (can be selected by the user) – device type (type of BTS device) – logged-in user

Second line: – complete directory path

On the disk level also the available capacity of the disk (e.g. 100%) is indicated inthe left or right upper corner.

An arrow below the menu title indicates the current direction of copying betweenthe directory windows.

EXITPress the associated function key to return from the FILE menu to the higher orderDISK menu.The status of the FILE menus, however, is preserved and will be restored after

renewed selection.

SELECTPress the associated function key to select a subdirectory in the current directorywindow or - if the cursor is in line *** TO UPPER DIR/ALL FILES *** - to return to thenext higher directory.

Press the associated function key to page up or down in the current directory win-

dow.




184

Press the associated function key to move the cursor one line up or down in thecurrent directory window.

PfeiltastenPress the associated function key to jump between the active directorywindows.The marker bar in the windows moves to the now active window. In addition, thewindow above the directory window is highlighted.

DEVICEPress the associated function key to return from the current directory windowdirectly to the highest level (device level).

USERThis softkey is only available on the file level. Each time you press the associatedfunction key, you switch over between the files that are available several times forthe different users within the directory (toggle mode).

ALDThis softkey appears only when the directory window displays the diskcontents(refer to section 3.6.14).




185

3.6.7 RENAMING FILES AND DEVICES

The Rename function permits changing the names of files, directories or devices.Device names can only be changed by users with SYSTEM access.

RENAMEIf you press the associated function key, a new window with a new key assignmentappears in the menu, where the new name can be entered.

Names can have the following lengths:

Device name: 8 characters

File names: 12 charactersDirectory names: 8 characters

All letters of the alphabet as well as the special and the numeric characters can beused for the name. The keypad in the Wipe panel and the numeric keypad are high-lighted with a running light to prompt the entry.




186

OKPress the associated function key to change the selected name to the new name.

RUBOUT Press the associated function key to delete the character left of the current cursorposition in the editing line.

CLEARPress the associated function key to clear the entire editing line.

CANCELPress the associated function key to cancel the renaming procedure.




188

3.6.9 DELETING AND RESETTING FILES

With the Delete function you can delete ”own”, i.e. user created files on the disklevel. Any files on the file level are not erased with the Delete function but are resetto their default system status. The DELETE Disk instruction can be used to eraseall files available on the disk and to make a selected user the new owner.

The respective file must be selected with the marker bar.

DELETEIf you press the associated function key, a window with a new key assignmentappears in the menu.

This window serves as a safety confirmation inquiry.

OKPress the associated function key to delete the selected file or to reset the selectedsystem file to default status.

CANCELPress the associated function key to cancel the deletion procedure.

USERThis softkey is only available on the disk level.

Repeated pressing of the associated function key permits successive selection ofall logged-in users in the switcher system. The user names are indicated in the win-dow. After completion of the deletion process (OK), the disk is reformatted andautomatically assigned to the user whose name was last selected with the USERkey.




189

3.6.10 DELETING AND RESETTING DIRECTORIES

If you want to delete or reset entire directories, the marker bar must be on***TO UPPER DIR/ALL FILES*** in the current directory window.

DELETEIf you press the associated function key, a window with a new key assignmentappears in the window. The menu window also contains the name of the userwhose files are deleted or reset.

OKPress the associated function key to delete or reset to default all files of thelogged-in user within this directory.

OK+DIRPress the associated function key to delete or reset to default all files of the selecteduser within this directory and in all subdirectories.

CANCELPress the associated function key to cancel the deletion procedure.




190

3.6.11 COPYING FILES

The Copy function permits to copy system files or user specific files within theswitcher or the entire switcher network.

With this function you can

– create backup copies – transfer system tables – exchange switcher settings among various users etc.

Copying is always made between two directory windows (source and destinationwindow). The directory need not belong to your ”own” E-box or your ”own” controlpanel. In copying you can access all directories of all devices connected to the net-work with the only limitation given by the user access rights defined in the ACCESSmenu.

If you copy from file to disk level, you will be asked to change the file name. Thecopied file will automatically take the user name of the logged-in user.




191

COPYIf you press the associated function key, a window with a new key assignmentappears in the menu, where the new file name can be entered if you wish to copyfrom the file level to the disk level.The name of the file may have up to 12 characters (XXXXXXXX.EXT).

OKPress the associated function key to copy the file selected in the source directoryunder its new name into the destination directory.

RUBOUTPress the associated function key to delete the character left of the current cursorposition in the editing line (only when copying from file level to disk level).

CLEARPress the associated function key to delete the entire entry in the editing line (onlywhen copying from file level to disk level).

CANCELPress the associated function key to cancel the copying procedure.




192

3.6.12 COPYING DIRECTORIES

If you want to copy entire directories, the marker bar must be on ***TO UPPER DIR/ ALL FILES*** in the currently selected directory window.

COPYIf you press the associated function key, a window with a new key assignmentappears in the menu. The menu window also indicates the user to whom the filesare assigned.

OKPress the associated function key to copy all files in the current directory into thedestination directory.

OK+DIRPress the associated function key to copy all files in the current directory as well asthe subdirectories into the destination directory.

CANCELPress the associated function key to cancel the copying procedure.




193

3.6.13 COPYING USER-SPECIFIC FILES

Different users may copy user-specific files within the switcher as follows:

Prerequisites For copying a file to another user, the user to receive the file (destination user) must

be logged in. In addition, the user must have access to the file to be copied (for fur-ther information please refer to the file description in the operating instructions).

Procedure

Select FILE menu.

Move cursor into the directory into which the file is to be copied (target direc-tory).

Change to the second directory window and position cursor on the file to becopied (source file)If you wish to copy the source file of a user different from the indicated user,

the USER softkey permits selecting the file of another user.

Press the COPY softkey. A window with the name of the target file and thelogged – in user will appear.

Press the OK softkey to start the copying procedure.

If the copying cannot be executed, a corresponding message appears in the acti-vity window.




194

3.6.14 LOADING BACKUP FILES (AUTO LOAD)

Supplement to the operation instructions, section File Menu.

When creating backup files, directory entries are made on the disk, having the type

designation ALD. When loading the backup data into the mixer, this type informa-tion is evaluated.Directories with the type information ALD are reloaded from the floppy disk intothe corresponding device (EBox, panel).Directories with the type information DIR are skipped when reloading.

Should be prevented that data are reloaded into the devices connected to the net-work, you can skip the corresponding directory by converting the type informationALD into DIR.

Conversion of the type information is possible by means of softkey ALD in the Filemenu. Insert the disk into the disk drive, move the cursor bar onto the correspon-ding directory and press softkey ALD. Every time the key is pressed, the type infor-mation changes from DIR into ALD.See in the figure (page 1) the files D5-PAN with the type DIR and D30-PAN withthe type ALD.

Softkey ALD appears only when the directory window displays the disk contents.

Softkey ALD appears onlywhen the directory windowdisplays the diskcontents.




195

3.6.15 ERROR MESSAGES

The following error messages may appear in the DISK menu. These messagesmust be seen in the direct context of the previously selected operating status. Thisstatus is also indicated in the error messages window.




196

Example of an error message

OKPress the associated function key to acknowledge the error message and to cancelthe selected function.




197



3.7 Transfer menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

198

3.7 TRANSFER MENU

The TRANSFER menu serves for the transfer of switcher settings between the vari-ous mixing levels of the switcher.

During this procedure either all settings of a mixing level or individual parameters(wipe, key, mattes) may be transferred.




199

UNDOPress the associated function key to recall the previous status after a transfer pro-cedure.

MODE

EXCHNGEach time you press the associated function key, you select a different mode forthe transfer:

EXCHNG In this transfer mode, the settings of the two defined levels areexchanged.

COPY In this transfer mode, the settings of one level are copied to the otherlevel, thus overwriting the previous setting.

MODULE

ME PATTER KEY COLOR

Press the associated function key to determine which settings are to be transferred.

ME all settings of one mixing level

PATTERN wipe pattern setting including wipe modifications

KEY key setting of one key level

COLOR color setting of the matte generators

After the selection a new menu appears with new softkeys that offer different entryoptions depending on the selection. Please refer to the illustrations on the nextpages.Subsequently enter the source of the setting transfer in the ”from” line and the des-tination of the setting transfer in the ”to” line. The possible entries are available assoftkeys in the menu. The transfer will automatically be executed after the entry hasbeen completed.

EXIT

Press the associated function key to return to the higher order STATUS menu.




200




201

Color pick In connection with the new key processor (RY 1943 with ChromaKey), it isfunction possible to select colors with the cursor from video pictures and to assign them to

each of the internal Matte and ColorBackgrounds generators.

COLOR PICK

KEY 1 KEY 2

Select with softkey COLOR PICK KEY1 or KEY2 the corresponding channel of thekeyers. The keyers panel is delegated accordingly and the functions chroma keyand cursor are switched on (key lit). In the menu, a window is displayed theinformation.

from: XXXXXXXXXto:

Position cursor to the desired color in the picture.



3.8 Masks menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

202

3.8 MASKS MENU

The MASKS menu is not selected from the STATUS menu but can only be selectedwith the menu selection keys. This menu serves for the delegation and the setting

of mask parameters.

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers provide extensive maskingcapabilities which enable the operator to correct even difficult pictures. For the key-ers, rectangular masks are available. As an alternative, also the wipe patterns ofthe wipe generator may be used for masking. The volatile masks store offers newways of masking. A key signal or a pattern signal may be stored. The PaintMode-Masking feature permits the creation of own masks which are perfectly adapted

to the individual requirements.




203

3.8.1 MASK DELEGATION

ME1

KEY1 KEY2

ME2

KEY1 KEY2

ME3

DSK1 DSK2

Press the associated function key to delegate the Masks panel to a keyer if youwant to change the mask generator proposed by the automatic delegation system.

3.8.2 CREATING A BOX MASK

Mask Source

PATT1 PATT2 STORE BOX BUS

The BOX key serves to select a rectangular mask for masking. The size of the maskcan be adjusted with the four controls LEFT, RIGHT, TOP, and BOTTOM.

LEFT RIGHT TOP BUTTON

Bar graphs to indicate the mask size.




204

3.8.3 ADJUSTING THE MASK POSITION

You can freely position the mask in the picture with the trackball in the Positionerpanel.For further information please refer to section Positioner Panel .

3.8.4 CREATING A WIPE MASK

Mask Source


With PATT1 or PATT2 one of the wipe generators can be selected for masking. Thewipe pattern can be directly selected with the wipe pattern selection keypad in theWipe panel. The size of the wipe pattern can be adjusted with the SIZE control inthe Wipe panel.

S I Z E

You can freely position the wipe mask in the picture with the trackball in the Posi-tioner panel after you have enabled Pos or Extend Pos in the Wipe panel.

For further information on the wipe pattern control please refer to the section Wipe Panel .

Note: Please note that the wipe generators can be used simultaneously for

several applications which may interact with one another.




205

3.8.5 CREATING A MASK FROM MASK STORE

Mask Source


The STORE key serves to select the mask store as mask source. The automaticdelegation system automatically switches over the Stores panel to Mask store con-trol.For further information on store control and PaintModeMasking please refer to thesection Stores Panel .

3.8.6 SELECTING ANY OTHER SOURCE AS MASK

Mask Source


If BUS is selected as a mask source, the luminance component of any input signalcan be used as a mask, with adjustable gain and clip. In order to select the source,hold down the Mask Bus key and select the input on the Aux Buses key bank.

Note: A mask bus is available in any mixing level.

3.8.7 OTHER SETTING OPTIONS

FORGNDPress the associated function key to select whether the mask should suppress(mask) or force the foreground picture (Forced Foreground). If enabled, ForcedForeground is active.

INVPress the associated function key to invert the mask signal.This means that, for instance, with a rectangular mask, not the inside but the out-side of the rectangle is used for masking.




206

PVWPress the associated function key to highlight the mask signal on the preview moni-tor.This function serves to adjust the mask.

Note:

In Mask PVW mode, the mask is only represented as a 1-bit signal. If you want to exactly position a mask with softness, simply switch on the mask with the Mask on key in the Keyers panel.

RESETPress the associated function key to position the box mask in the center of the pic-ture at a preset size.

EXIT

Press the associated function key to return to the previously selected menu.




207



3.9 Stores menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

208

3.9 STORES MENU

The STORES menu is not selected from the STATUS menu but can only beselected with the menu selection keys. The menu serves for the operation of the

in-built (video) stores of the switcher.

The Diamond digital DD20/DD30 production switchers include four volatile storesfor video signals and key, shadow or trick signals which permit the creation of neweffects without using external units.

The video store permits storing a 4:2:2 video signal which can then be faded inas freeze picture.

The matte store serves to store a key or wipe signal which can then be used formodulating the background matte. The matte store is also used for storing Fractal-Textures.

The mask store permits storing a key or wipe signal or creating own masks withPaintModeMasking.

There is one mask store in each mixing level.

The Shadow Stores (as part of the optional montage processor) permit creatinga freely positioning drop shadow for a key signal. For this purpose it is enough toenable the Shdw store key in the corresponding keyers panel. The shadow will

have the same color as a key Border/Shdw/Drop/Outline.

Note: If the shadow is positioned above and left of the key signal, the shadow signal is delayed by one frame versus the key signal for technical reasons. This phenomenon can be seen with moving key signal. Each ME has a shadow store.




209

3.9.1 SELECTING THE MIXING LEVELS

ME

Press the associated function key to assign the STORES Menu for the Mask Storeand Shdw Store to the MEs if you want to change the ME proposed by the automaticdelegation system.

The current assignment (e.g. ME1) is indicated in the menu.

3.9.2 STORE DELEGATION

Store Selection

MATTEMASK VIDEO

The delegation keys MASK, MATTE and VIDEO serve to switch the menu controlto one of the stores.

3.9.3 FIELD AND FRAME MODE

FRAME

FIELDIf you press the associated function key, you can select separately for each storewhether both fields or a particular field is to be recalled from the store.This key is enabled in all store modes.Each time you press this key, one of three operational statuses will appear in cycli-

cal order.

• FRAME

• 1st FIELD

• 2nd FIELD

For the mask store also the read-in operation can be switched over to Field orFrame mode. This avoids field flickering during storing.




211

3.9.7 MASKE STORE

Store Source

PATT1 PATT2 KEY1 KEY2 BUS

The signals used in the mask store are to be taken from the same ME.

To store a mask, proceed as follows:

• Select the signal to be stored in the mask store with PATT1 / PATT2 or

KEY1 / KEY2 in the menu.

• In order to assign a key signal as a source to the store, press KEY1 or KEY2.


• To store a wipe signal, press PATT1 or PATT2. The desired wipe pattern and

the modification can then be selected in the Wipe panel.

Mask Store




212

3.9.8 PAINTMODEMASKING

Paint Mode

PAINT RUB CLEARON SHIFT

If you wish to create an individual mask, it is recommended to use a wipe signal asbrush. For this purpose, select the corresponding generator with WIPE1 or WIPE2.

ON • For a free design of a mask, enable PaintModeMasking with the ON softkey.

The preview monitor now shows the wipe pattern as cursor if STORE is selectedas mask source in a mask generator.

Note: In the DD20 and DD30 switchers the cursor is available at the

PVW output of the respective switching level. If Auto PVW is enabled, the PVW bus follows .

Type of wipe and any modifications can be selected in the Wipe panel. The sizecan be adjusted with the SIZE control.

PAINT • Start the painting process with PAINT and paint using the cursor as brush.

RUBOUT • Press RUB to use the cursor as rubber.

CLEAR • Press CLEAR to delete the contents of the mask store.

SHIFT • Press SHIFT to shift the output picture of the store with the trackball.

If a key signal is selected as brush, either the key signal may be stored as freezeor, in the case of a moving picture such as camera pan or zoom, a mask may becreated.

Note: If a key or pattern signal is stored, Mask store is automatically selected and Mask PVW is enabled. The mask is displayed in Mask PVW mode as 1-bit signal only. If you wish a precise positioning of a mask with softness, switch on the mask in the associated keyer.

EXIT


MASKS

Press the associated function key to change directly to the MASKS menu.




213



3.10 GPI-AC menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

214

3.10 GPI-AC MENU

The GPI-AC menu serves to enable GPI inputs and GPI outputs.

3.10.1 GPI INPUT

After selection in the STATUS menu, the entry menu for the GPI inputs is displayed.A matrix is provided to define which functions the individual input channels controlin the mixing levels ME1, ME2, PP, FTB, EXTRA, 16/9 and STD (TV-standard625/525). A black mark in the matrix shows which input acts on which function.

EXIT


GPI

OUTPress the associated function key to change to the GPI output menu.

TIMEPress the associated function key to enter the auto transition duration in the columnin which the cursor appears.

SETPress the associated function key to set a mark at the position selected with thecursor keys, which assigns the respective GPI input a function in the individual mix-ing levels.




215

DELETEPress the associated function key to delete a mark at the position selected with thecursor keys.

TRIGGERPress the associated function key to simulate the currently selected GPI channel(the column in which the cursor is positioned) for testing and installation purposes.

Press the associated function key to move the cursor in the entry matrix. Theselected position is identified with a frame.




216

3.10.2 GPI OUTPUT

The GPI OUT menu serves to enable the GPI outputs. A matrix is provided to definewhich GPI outputs are to be switched during a transition (start and end) in the indi-vidual mixing levels.

A black mark in the matrix shows which transition function acts on which GPI outputchannel.

EXIT


GPI

INPress the associated function key to change to the GPI input menu.

SETPress the associated function key to set a mark at the position selected with thecursor keys, which assigns a function to the respective GPI output in the individualmixing levels.

DELETEPress the associated function key to delete a mark at the position selected with thecursor keys.




217

TRIGGERPress the associated function key to enable the associated GPI output.

Press the associated function key to move the cursor in the entry matrix. Theselected position is identified with a frame.



3.11 Bus Correction menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

218

3.11 BUS CORRECTION MENU

The BUS CORRECTION menu serves to adjust brightness, contrast, saturationand color balance related to the bus.



3.11 Bus Correction menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

219

EXIT


BRIGHT CONTR. SATUR. BALANC

Bar graphs for the indication of the color parameters. These parameters areadjusted with four digipots.

PGM RST FILL1 FILL2

Calib. Calib. Calib. Calib.

ME2

Press the associated function key to select one of the output buses for the respec-tive mixing level ME1. ME2, PP. The color parameters of the output signal may thenbe adjusted with the four digipots.The status of the buses is indicated with

Calib. = calibratedModif. = modifiedCol off = black and white

COLOFFPress the associated function key to switch the color on/off completely.

RESETME

Press the associated function key to reset the values for all busses of the selectedME to their default values.

RESETBUS

Press the associated function key to reset the values for a single bus of the selectedME to their default value.



3.12 Input Correction menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

220

3.12 INPUT CORRECTION MENU

The INPUT CORRECTION menu serves to adjust brightness, contrast, saturationand color balance related to the inputs.

The fields of the sources where color parameters were modified are displayed ingrey in the menu.



3.12 Input Correction menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

221

EXIT


BRIGHT CONTR. SATUR. BALANC

Bar graphs for the indication of the color parameters. The mask position is adjusted

with four digipots.

RESETPress the associated function key to reset the values for the selected input to theirdefault value.

COLOFFPress the associated function key to switch the color on/off completely.

Press the associated function key to move the cursor from field to field in the entrymatrix.

RESETALL

Press the associated function key to reset the values of all inputs to their defaultvalues.



3.13 Montage Processor Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

222

3.13 MONTAGE-PROCESSOR (OPTIONAL)

3.13.1 GENERAL

The (optional) montage processor board RY 1913 includes two full montage pro-

cessors MPR1 and MPR 2 with storing functions. Position and readout of bothchannels can be coupled with the Coupled button.

This is mainly used to store and modify a video signal together with the correspond-ing key signal. Each montage processor has two frame stores connected in series,which are designated here as 1st and 2nd store of a channel. The montage proces-sor is menu controlled. The menus are enabled with the Mont Proc button in theSTATUS menu of the switcher.

The MAIN menu serves to set all parameters relevant to the storage function of themontage processor.

In each channel on the montage processor board there is a pixel manipulatorbehind the store. The parameters of the pixel manipulator are selected in the corre-sponding PIXMAN menu. This permits pixel-by-pixel manipulation of the videoimage.

The MATTE menu permits the selection of the matte – corresponding to the matteoperation in the switcher – which is to appear as background after the shifting ofthe video signal in the store.

ME1

ME2

PP

MPR1

MPR2

Matrix

......

1 ... 32

ME1 OUT

ME2 OUT

MAIN OUT

Inputs

The input signals are selected by delegation with the Mont Proc button on the AUXbus key row.For channel MPR1 the source can be selected directly. For channel MPR2 theMont Proc button must be held down.The output signals of the two channels are available on the input matrix by selectionof the 2nd key and source MPR1 or MPR2. However, they may likewise be

assigned to any crossbar key by means of the IDENT INPUT menus.

MPR 1/2

Main Men ü

Pixelmanipulator

Matte-Men ü

Integration of the montage processor

in the video signal path

Selection of the input and output signals




223

3.13.2 MAIN-MENU

The menus for the two montage processors MPR1 and MPR2 are identical.

The EXIT button serves to return from the MAIN menu to the higher order STATUSmenu of the switcher.

Press the MPR1 MAIN or the MPR2 MAIN button to change to the MAIN menu ofthe other channel.

The MATTE button serves to change to the MATTE menu of the selected channel.

The PIXMAN button serves to change to the pixel manipulator menu of the selectedchannel.

The CROP button serves to adapt the blanking to the norm blanking for analog si-

gnals i.e. the black bars on the right and left picture edge will be replaced with thebackground color.

In Latch mode the two frame stores connected in series are used in one channel.In this operation the processor switches several times between the two storeswithin one video image, with the video contents of the second store delayed by oneframe to the first store. The delay between the two frame stores connected in seriesis only visible in moving image parts, and only there the Latch mode effect will bevisible.

EXIT

MPR1 MAIN MPR2 MAIN

MATTE

PIXMAN

CROP

ON OFF

LATCH




224

By pressing the ON button the Latch mode is enabled. The switch over betweenthe two store signals is made in horizontal and/or vertical stripes, adjustable byrepeated actuation of the H (V or H+V) button.

The WIDTH parameter can be changed with the two analogue controllers on theleft side of the display. The bar symbol serves as a graphic aid to permit the repro-duction of certain settings. The bar indicates the width or the height of the stripesfor the switching over between the first and the second store. As the parameterinfluences both directions in the same way, a checkerboard pattern will result withLatch mode and H+V enabled.

Note: The Latch Width settings affect both channels MPR1 and MPR2.However, each channel can be enabled separately.

The FREEZE INPUT buttons give you three options for freezing a video image:The FREEZE INPUT buttons FRAME, FIELD1 and FIELD2 serve to selectwhether a frame, field1 or field2 is to be stored. The buttons are mutually exclusive.This permits a ”double” use of the video store, e.g. to store two different fields forbackgrounds.

The FREEZE MODE buttons serve to select the mode for freezing a video image:

If the FREEZE button is pushed, the relevant component (frame, field1, field2)depending on the FREEZE INPUT setting, of the currently available video imageis frozen.

By selecting STROBE the Strobe mode is enabled for the selected field(s)(depending on the FREEZE INPUT setting). The two right – hand analogue control-lers LIVE (top) and FREEZE (bottom) permit the setting of the delay between fro-zen image and live image (in frames). To permit a reproduction of a given setting,the current setting is displayed as a bar together with a percentage indication.If a video with movement is selected as input signal, a stroboscope effect will resultif the Strobe mode is enabled.

Note: If the video running through the store is used in a recursion to serve as input signal and the current video is displaced with the trackball,this will result in a trailing effect. Here the two channels should be operated in Couple mode, so that the corresponding key signal is modified as well.Please refer also to the Application Notes.

The LIVE and FREEZE controllers permit the selection of a maximum of 15 frames each.

Pressing the GRAB button permits a manual intervention in the storing processand the storing of a new video image, depending on the preselection in FREEZEINPUT.

ON H, V, H+V

LATCH WIDTH

FREEZE INPUT FRAME FIELD1FIELD2

FREEZE MODE

FREEZE

STROBE

GRAB




225

If the COUPLED button is highlighted, the montage processor is in Couple mode,i.e. the two processors (MPR1 and MPR2) are initialized with the same position andoutput parameters (see softbuttons POSITION and OUTPUT), namely the MPR1Parameters.

The POSITION ON button (highlighted) serves to enable the Position mode andthe stored video image is positioned on the most recent setting. If off (low lighted)the video image is centered.

The TRACKBall button serves to assign the trackball to the Position mode of themontage processor, i. e. the video in the store can be shifted with the trackball.

Horizontal and vertical position display for the trackball adjustment in pixel values:

H - 720 ... +720 pixelV - 576 ... +576 lines (625 lines standard) e.g.

- 508 ... +576 lines (525 lines standard)

The values serve for the orientation in order to reproduce special adjustments.

The OUTPUT buttons FRAME, FIELD1 and FIELD 2 serve to select whether aFrame, Field1 or Field2 of the frame is to be recalled from the store.

Note: When a frozen video image with moving contents is recalled in Frame mode, field flicker may occur at the moved objects. If one of the Field modes is selected, this flicker stops. However, also the vertical resolution is halved, as now for each frame one of the fields is recalled twice.

Below the OUTPUT selection buttons the menu contains a status indication withthree fields next to each other. In a simplified way they show the status of the per-taining field store. The indications change only as a result of a selection of theFREEZE MODE buttons and the selection of the relevant FREEZE INPUT.

If theFRAME

function in the FREEZE INPUT

group is active, pressingFREEZEor GRAB in the FREEZE MODE group puts all three indications to ”STILL”. If

instead STROBE is pressed, they change to ”STROBE”.If no button in the FREEZE MODE group is active, the live image running throughthe store is indicated with ”LIVE”.

If the FIELD1 or FIELD2 function in the FREEZE INPUT group is active, the corre-sponding status field will only be updated to ”STILL” or ”STROBE” when FREEZE,GRABor STROBE is pushed in the FREEZE MODE group. The other field remainsunchanged by this update.

COUPLED POS+OUT

POSITION ON

TRACKB all

POSITION

OUTPUT FRAME,FIELD1FIELD2

Input Status (Display of contents)




226

Note: As soon as individual fields are stored, the Frame status field of belonging to the OUTPUT group of buttons is set to ”– – – – –” . This indicates that the store contains different scenes in its field stores which would not be useful if displayed in a frame. Nevertheless in this case the store can still be read out in the frame mode (for special

effects).

Possible indications:

FRAME INPUT STATUS:”LIVE” ”STILL” ”STROBE” ”– – – – –”FIELD1 INPUT STATUS: ”LIVE” ”STILL” ”STROBE” FIELD2 INPUT STATUS: ”LIVE” ”STILL” ”STROBE

If PIXMAN ON is highlighted, the pixel manipulator of the respective channel isenabled. The relevant parameters can be selected in the pixel manipulator menu.

PIXMAN ON




227

3.13.3 MATTE-MENU

The montage processor provides for each of the two channels a matte generator,which creates two independent mattes Matte1 and Matte2.In the respective MATTE menu, the color(s) for the store background can beselected which will appear in the free areas of the original image after a video hasbeen shifted in the store. The parameters correspond to the parameters of the othermattes in the switcher.For further information please refer to the Matte panel in the Operating Instructions.

Note: If the buttons below or above a controller symbol (knob) are pushed,the individual groups of bars can be enabled and assigned to the digipots. Active bars are highlighted.

The left bar in the groups can be adjusted with the digipot on the upper left-hand side. The middle bar is adjusted with the digipot on the lower left-hand side and the right bar with the two digipots on the right-hand side.

The EXIT button serves to return from the MATTE menu to the higher order MAIN

menu MPR1 or MPR2 of the montage processor.

Press the MPR1 MATTE or the MPR2 MATTE button to change to the MAIN menuof the other channel.

Delegation softkey for analogue control groups (MATTE1, MATTE2 and WASH).

Matte-Menu

EXIT

MATTE MPR1MATTE MPR2




228

The PIXMAN button serves to change to the pixel manipulator menu of the selectedchannel.

The MATTE OUTPUT buttons provide three options for the background matte:The MATTE1 and MATTE2 buttons serve to select the set mattes and the WASHbutton permits a combination of the two mattes.The analogue controllers SOFT,POS and ANGLE belonging to the bar diagrams can be used to determine the com-position of the two mattes. The buttons below the bars are used to change theparameters indicated by the bars to a default setting.

SOFT middle softness (50 %)POS image centreANGLE horizontal division: matte2 top, matte1 bottom

Setting of the hue, chroma and luminance of matte1 and matte2. The buttons belowthe bars are used to change the parameters indicated by the bars to a default set-ting.

HUE Reset to 0 % (blue)CHR Reset to 0 % (no color)LUM Reset to black

Note: When LUM is reset, the internal color triangle limitation automatically resets the corresponding CHR value to 0 %.

PIXMAN

MATTE OUTPUT MATTE1MATTE2 WASH

*

MATTE 1/2




229

3.13.4 PIXELMANIPULATOR-MENU

Note: Before the settings become visible in the image, PIXMAN=ON must be enabled.

The EXIT button serves to return from the pixel manipulator menu to the higherorder MAIN menu MPR1 or MPR2 of the montage processor.

Press the MPR1 PIXMAN or the MPR2 PIXMAN button to change to the PIXMANmenu of the other channel.

The MATTE button serves to change to the MATTE menu of the correspondingchannel.

The HUE group of buttons permits a manipulation of the color of the stored videoimage:• If you press INV, the color is inverted (1805 in the color circle)• If you press KILL, all colors are set to ”red”.

The SATURATION group of buttons permits a manipulation of the color saturationof the stored video image.• If you press INV, the color saturation is inverted.• If you press KILL, the color saturation is set to ”Zero=no color”.

The LUMINANCE group of buttons permits a manipulation of the brightness of thestored video image. • If you press INV, the luminance is inverted (bright=dark). • If you press KILL, all luminance values are set to ”zero”.

EXIT

PIXMAN MPR1PIXMAN MPR2

MATTE

HUE INV ert KILL

SATURATION INV ert KILL

LUMINANCE INV ert KILL




230

Selection of an offset which is added to or deducted from the luminance, saturationor hue parameters modified (if applicable) with INV and KILL.The middle position represents zero. The buttons below the bars are used to resetthe offset parameters to zero (50 %).

HUE modification with analogue controllers:

Offset setting of the hue.

Segmentation of the hue value rangeMinimum number of colors: 0 % = 4 colors

Note: Is without function if HUE KILL was enabled.

SATURATION modification with analogue controllers:

Offset setting of the color saturation.

Segmentation of the saturation value range.Minimum number of stages: 0 % = 2 stages (saturated or b/w)

Note: Is without function if SATURATION KILL was enabled.

LUMINANCE modification with analogue controllers:

Offset setting of the brightness.

Segmentation of the saturation value range of luminance.

Note: Is without function if LUMINANCE KILL was enabled.

After activating the softkey (ON), the setting becomes visible in the image.

COLOR / LUMAController

SHIFT

PALETT e

DEPTH

POSTER isation

BRIGHT ness

SOLAR isation

PIXMAN ON OFF




231

3.13.5 MONTAGE PROCESSOR

HARDWARE COMPONENTS

The Montage Processor consists of:

• 2 Channels of VIDEO- and/or KEY-STORES (Control parameters can becoupled).

• 2 independent PIXEL-MANIPULATION stages on the Processor Board, each one connected to the output of a dedicated Store channel.

• 3 ”FAR SHADOW STORES” for Drop Shadows on keyed signals .

NOTE: In a DD20 E – Box only 2 are connected !

• 2 additional Matte Generators (with Wash).

3.13.5.1 STORE SECTIONModes

Each Store channel can be operated in one of three different modes. All modes inc-lude an AUTO FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION of asynchronous, external sourcesrelative to the switcher timing.

The modes are:

FRAMESTORE MODE

MOVE MODE

LATCH MODE

Due to different internally switched signal paths there are some restrictions thatapply to specific modes.

In general F R A M E S T O R E and L A T C H use the same basic signal path.In both cases a 2-dimensional positioning of Video- and/or Key-Store images isnot possible . To access these modes select the POSITION ON soft button in theappropriate MPR 1/2 menu to the inactive state (black).The LATCH mode can then be reached by switching on the ”LATCH ON/ OFF” softbutton.

NOTE: There is only one Latch-Sequence generator for both MPR channels!

The Framestore signal delay is one frame. The delay for signals used with Latchmode is up to two frames!

The MOVE mode has to be used when a horizontal and/or vertical displacementof the picture is needed. The minimum horizontal shift is two luminance pixels andvertically it is one frame line.This mode is automatically addressed when switching the POSITION ON soft but-ton to the active state (light). The Trackball can then be delegated to the appropriateMPR store by pushing the TRACKB soft button once.With zero displacement the delay is timed to one frame. When the image is movedupward it is reduced to a minimum of approx. one field. When totally moved downit will be approx. three fields.

The Positioning-Trackball is automatically delegated to the MPR whose Crosspointbutton was last recently selected on the PGM/PST bar of any ME.




232

3.13.5.2 SOURCE SELECTION FOR MPR

The following operations have to be performed for each MPR to feed it with videoor key.

Select VIDEO SOURCE on MPR CROSSBAR.Activate ” MONT.PROC.” button in AUX-Delegation module .MPR1 is fed by video of selected crosspoint on the AUX-Input-Crossbar. To feedMPR2 with another video source, hold down the ” MONT.PROC.” button while atthe same time you select an input on the AUX-Input-Crossbar. For primary inputsources and ME or PP outputs the procedure is easy to follow.

Since there is no dedicated Key source and no corresponding Key-Source buttonfor direct feeding of an MPR to be used for Key signals, it becomes a little bit moresophisticated to achieve this.

Select KEY SOURCE on MPR CROSSBAR.

Usually MPR1 is fed by video. So, to feed MPR2 with a Key signal take the outputof the KEY PREVIEW of an unused Keyer.

NOTE: To avoid problems caused by DD ’ s AutoDelegation / Auto Follow functions it is recommended to use a keyer and the according KeyPVW output of an otherwise unused ME (e. g. ME1-Key 1).

– Select Key Source for that Keyer (e. g. Pattern 1 (2) , Key Bus, Maskor Chromakey....

– Select KeyPVW in KEYERS module– Activate ” MONT.PROC.” button in AUX – Delegation module, hold it

down and select ME(1)-PVW. Yet this will become the Key source for MPR2.




233

3.13.5.3 MONTAGE PROCESSOR MENU

Select MONTAGE PROCESSOR MENU for MPR1 or MPR2 on the Display.

MAIN: In this operational stage the MPRs allow freezing and grabbing of live image

sources and access to further on board features. This can be done separately orcoupled.

NOTE: MPR2 can be coupled to MPR1 but not vice versa!

PIXMAN: This sub menu allows changes of video characteristics on a pixel by pixelbasis. The video stream is separated into LUMINANCE, SATURATION and HUEto be passed through three Lookup-Tables for independent brightness and colorchanges. For instance you can shift the original colors with a hue offset, tint the pic-ture, invert levels and gate out only certain levels, which leads to functions knownas SOLARIZATION, POSTERIZATION and PALETTE.

NOTE: Colors that are modified with these functions may exceed the borders of the allowed color space. Unpermitted colors will result.

MATTE: This sub menu allows 2 onboard color matte generators to be setup asknown from BGD MATTES. These mattes will only be fully visible when the entirevideo of a store in move mode is moved out of the screen area. The matte color(s)(also with wash) will appear underneath the moved portion of an image.

NOTE: A matte background should be reset to black in case of either non – cropped and moved analog source material– or – when a channel is to be used for moving Key signals .

It is recommended that the MAIN menu is selected for the entire period of timewhere MONTAGE PROCESSOR functions have to be performed.The delegation of the trackball (for positioning) can only be controlled from here bypushing the TRACKB botton once!

For all other MPR-Menu functions refer to the corresponding chapter in theOperations manual!




234

3.13.5.4 SWITCHER SETUP FOR VIDEO STORE RECURSIONS

Recursive effects require a number of resources your DD20/30 naturally provides.In general you have to use two ME’s to achieve recursive effects.

Resources that will be used are PATTERN GENERATORS, KEYERS and TRAN-

SITION STAGES to perform MIX and WIPE functions and of course another VIDEOFRAME STORE.

The Video Frame Store is used for the recursion and MPR stores have to be opera-ted in the before mentioned MOVE MODE to allow simple DVE effects as Trails,Sparkles etc..

The MPR stores will only be used to crop part of the live video and to move this withits corresponding Crop Key across the screen.

The Crop Key area is represented by a Key signal and built with either an internalPattern or Key- or an external Key source. As you know the Key PVW of an ME hasto be used to establish this signal path.

Please note that the Background for Video-Store-recursive effects has to be a frozen image, another still source or a camera scene with no motion. When motion occurs it will result in motion blurr artifacts!

The following Blockdiagram shows the example setup and can be used as refe-rence:

Pattern..... from

ME1 – Key (1 or 2)

PVW

Live Source

STILL Background source

Select Effect TYPE

(= Transition type) ME 2

Select

BORDER & Fill

BGD

MPR2 (Key)

VIDEO STOREFeed with ME 2

MPR1 (Vid) Key

2

# BAR ME2 – KEY2 SOURCE

# BAR ME2 – KEY2 FILL

# BAR ME2 – PGM

# BAR ME2 – PST




235

The following descriptions should be regarded as examples.To avoid confusion itis recommended to follow these guidelines and not to freeze MPR or VIDEO storesat this time!

FEED MPR1 WITH VIDEO FROM LIVE SOURCE

– Control your results by viewing the output of MPR1. Select MPR1 for monitoring (e. g. PP-PGM) output.

– Select ”MONT.PROC” Aux button, don’t hold it down and then chooselive input source crosspoint on AUX crossbar.

– It is recommended to reset MPR1 BGD MATTE to black.

FEED MPR2 WITH KEY FROM ME1

– Control your results by viewing the output of MPR2. Select MPR2 for monitoring (PGM) output.

– Select ME1-KEY1 (or 2) as PATTERN 1 (or 2) Key, Chromakey or

other Key types with appropriate source settings. Regarding the chosen key type it is not relevant which Fill signal is selected.

– Push the Key PVW button twice to get the Key signal.

– If PATTERN is selected adjust ME(1)-Primary (or secondary) Wipe for correct size as Crop area (use ”SIZE” knob [in Fader end positions only] or ME(1) fader bar).

– Select PVW-ME1 as Key source (see section 3.13.5.2).

– Reset MPR2 BGD MATTE to black.

COUPLE PARAMETERS FOR MPR1 & MPR2

– Select couple button in MPR1-Main-Menu (top left corner).

DELEGATE TRACKBALL ACCESS TO MPRs

– Select TRACKB button in MPR1-Main-Menu (low right corner)

– Activate POSITION ON button (white box).

CUT MPR1 SIGNAL OVER OUTPUT OF ME2

– Select ME2_KEY2 as LIN/LUM Key, to be filled with MPR1 and keyed with MPR2 in the COUPLE/SPLIT mode, both taken from the KEY BUS row of ME2.

– Set this Key on top of the ME-2 output (via CUT button in Keyers section of ME2).

– On this Keyer you could also select a border or shadows from the borderliner only, or ”Far Shadows” of the onboard key stores if this is wished.

NOTE: Far shadows are not recommended if you wish to move the cropped MPR- video across the screen borders ! As soonas the Crop pattern leaves the active

area the corresponding far shadow signal will be cut off, being derived from the active sreen area !!!

SETUP VIDEO- STORE-LOOP (Example)




237

While using all these effects it is still possible for the cropped and moved live con-tents to be frozen, grabbed or applied with the STROBO function. However, it is notpossible to make use of the LATCH Mode, while being in the MOVE Mode withPOSITION ON activated.

3.13.5.5 SWITCHER SETUP FOR MPR-RECURSIONS (MPR –LOOP)

Unlike in 3.13.5.4, in this configuration there is no need for an additional VIDEOSTORE.

MPRs are directly part of a closed loop and could be used independently (e. g. indifferent MEs). Basically there is also no need for a separate Key signal.

When the underlying MPR-Matte is selected to be ”BLUE”, a cursor can be control-

led to pick up that ”border color” for automatic Chromakey adjustment and Keyingthe effects image on in another ME’s Keyers section (e. g. via DSKs in the PPstage).

THE LOOP:The output of an ME containing a mixture (sparkle, spiral or matrix block wipes ...)of the MPR-output and a live video is routed to the same MPR input. When the MPRimage is now slightly displaced from its original position the recursion leads to nicedefragmentation effects according to the wipe pattern chosen for tha BackgroundTransition on the ME that is part of the loop.

The more MPR displacement from the center position the coarser the defragmen-tation and the quicker the move out will be. Best effects are achieved with minimumdisplacement in H + V.

PREPARE MPR POSITIONING

– Select ”Live/Video Source” as input for MPR1 (or 2).

– Select ”MontProc” Display menu button.

– Push ”Position” to ”ON” or if already ON, select ”TRACKB” to haveTrackball access for MPR positioning.

– Move image away from center position

– Select MATTE1 Color and adjust it to ”BLUE” (Chromakey preparation).

PREPARE ME1 (or 2) FOR MPR-KEY-RECURSION – Select ”Live/Video Source” on ME1 (or 2) BACKGROUND Bus

– Select ”MPR1” (or MPR2) on ME1 (or 2) BACKGD.PRESET Bus

– Now select ”ME1 (or 2)” as MPR1 (or MPR2) input.

MPR used without external key signals (Complex FX-transitions)




238

DEFINE EFFECTS TYPE

– Select WIPE as BGD Transition Type for ME with MPR recursion.

The chosen wipe style results in different effects. Also try to put a border aroundyour shape. This will end up in effects that look like a centipede trail.

For ”Spray” effects it is recommended to use the before mentioned sparkle wipe.Another nice effect can be attained with a stretched circle (# 124) and most of theMOD and MULTI parameters turned on to full extent (=bubble effects).Using the shapes # 134-136 ends up in defragmentation effects never seen before.Matrix Tricks # 85, 93, 94 can create funny looking effects,especially when theMPR displacement is very close to the center position.It is recommended to gain practice in handling these effects by simply steppingthrough quite a number of wipe shapes and changing their modifiers. Once youcreated your own special pattern this can be stored in one of the USER Registersfor instant access.

– The FADER bar controls the movement and appearance of the effect in combination with the applied MPR image offset. With increasing amount of MPR feedback the resulting image gets more and more frozen while being moved out of the screen. Right now the recursive image is still residing on a blue background.To let another live image appear underneath Chromakeying has to be used in another ME or PP stage.

SETUP CHROMAKEY IN OTHER ME (or DSK of PP)

– Choose KEY or DSK 1 (or 2) in KEYERS / DSK module.

– Select ”Chr Key”.

– Select ME1 (or 2) on the KEY BUS row of current ME (or PP).

– Set FILL and SOURCE to ”Key Bus”.

– Push ”Key PVW”.

– Setup Automatic Key Adjustment (”AUTO”).When another border color than blue is preferred adjust that MPR-matte and use

”Cursor” to pick up that color. It is very helpful when the MPR image is displaced a little bit more to have a blue area that is at least as wide as the cursor size is.

RUN THE EFFECT

– When setup is finished simply ”CUT” on this Key and start to move the image with the Fader for the BGD transition in ME1 (or 2).




239

MPR USED WITH EXTERNAL KEY SIGNALS (COMET TRAILS ....)

Here the MPR store is used to generate a key signal containing a trail.

Depending on the direction and amount of the chosen displacement it is possibleto generate dynamic trails on still standing objects (e. g. Character Generator). For

this sort of effects it is recommended to use either sparkle-wipes (star trail) or themix function (centipede with decay).

THE LOOP:The output of an ME containing a mixture (mix or sparkles ....) of the MPR-outputand a black background is routed to the same MPR input. When the MPR imageis now slightly displaced from its original position the recursion leads to the beforementioned defragmentation effects appearing now as a key signal trail, generatedin the ME that is part of the loop.

Best effects will also be achieved with minimum displacement in H + V.

This ME Summary-Key-Signal should later be used as KEY SOURCE for a Keyerin another ME (or PP).

PREPARE ME1 (or 2) FOR MPR-KEY-RECURSION

– Select ”MPR1” (or MPR2) on ME1 (or 2) BACKGROUND Bus.

– Select ”BLACK” on ME1 (or 2) BACKGD.PRESET Bus.

– Setup ”KEY 1” (or KEY 2):

KEY SOURCE is Key Signal from Character Generator (”Key Bus”),KEY FILL should be ”Key Bus” (or white MATTE) as well.

– Choose ”ADD” or ”LIN/LUM” Key Type, if neccessary push ”AUTO”.

– ”CUT” on the adjusted Key.

– Now close the loop by selecting ”ME1 (or 2)” as MPR1 (or MPR2) input.

PREPARE MPR POSITIONING

– Select ”MontProc” Display menu button.

– Push ”Position” to ”ON” or if already ON, select ”TRACKB” to have Trackball access for MPR positioning.

– Move image slightly away from center position.

– Select MATTE1 Color and adjust outer portions to ”BLACK”.

DEFINE EFFECTS TYPE

– Select WIPE as BGD Transition Type for ME with MPR recursion.

The chosen wipe style results in different effects. For Startrail effects it is recom-mended to use the before mentioned sparkle wipe.Once you created your own special pattern this can be stored in one of the USERRegisters for instant access.

NOTE: Currently the MPR-module is not part of the EXTRA Timeline System. The- refore the MPR-displacement has to be setup manually. But all other bank related settings can be stored as SNAPSHOTs or entire Timelines, allowing a fast access to this kind of effects.

– The FADER bar controls the length of the trail in combination with the applied MPR image offset.

EXTERNAL KEY SIGNAL IS NOT MOVED




240

SETUP KEYERS IN OTHER ME (or DSK of PP)

The first steps (a) add the trail to the output:

(a)

– Choose KEY 1 or DSK 1 in another ME’s KEYERS / DSK module

(Push ”Key PVW”).

– Select ”ADD” (or ”LIN/LUM”) Key Type.

– Select Key – Recursion ME1 (or 2) on the KEY BUS row of current ME (or PP).

– Set FILL and SOURCE to ”Key Bus” (Push Automatic Key Adjustment (”AUTO”) if neccessary) .

The next steps (b) put the original key and fill on top of it:

(b)

– Choose KEY 2 or DSK 2.

– Select ”ADD” (or ”LIN/LUM”) Key Type. – Select external (Char.Gen.) Key on the KEY BUS row.

– Set FILL and SOURCE to ”Key Bus” (or FILL with MATTE) (Push Automatic Key Adjustment (”AUTO”) if neccessary).

NOTE: The external KEY and FILL signal (from CG..) should always be fed to KEYER2 and put on top of the recursive keytrail coming from another ME (1), used by KEYER 1.

RUN THE EFFECT

– When setup is finished simply ”CUT” on both Key Signals. To regain

access to the trackball delegation select”MontProc

” Menu buttonand either push POSITION to ”ON” or if already on hit the ”TRACKB”

button once. Then start to move the trail only with the Trackball.

In principal it is a similar setup to 3.13.5.5 except that the Key Source signal (fromthe CG) must be routed through a second MPR channel whose position must becoupled to the MPR that is part of the recursive loop.

Hold down AUX-Bar ”MONT PROC” delegation button and feed it with externalKEY SOURCE (e.g. CG-Key) via AUX-Bar Crosspoint.

For the Keyer being used to generate the ME 1 recursion signal, use the output ofMPR2 (= moved Key Signal) instead of the original external Key.

Feed KEY 2 (or DSK 2) of other ME (or PP) with MPR2 output (= moved Key)instead of using the external (Char.Gen.) Key (see 3.13.5.5 (b)).

NOTE: Since there is no third MPR channel that could additionally be used to move the external (Char.Gen.) FILL signal, this MPR2-moved Key has to be filled with an internal Keyer-MATTE signal.

External key signal should be moved (together withCOMET TRAIL)




241

3.13.5.6 NOTES FOR THE USE OF LATCH-MODE

As already described in the Operations Manual, the LATCH mode allows to seecontents of two images at the same time.

This is only possible when the image is centered and the MOVE MODE is swit-

ched off (”pos” (or: ”POSITION on”) switched to be a black box).Those two images are coming from the same source but are delayed to each otherby one frame. The sequence that switches over between both images looks like acheckerboard, with blocks, equally sizable in horizontal and/or vertical direction.The bigger the blocks, the more obvious is the effect on parts of the image thatmove or change with time.

This could either be used for source material containing natural motion, or for bor-ders of wipe effects and the like.

Just setup the recursive loop as described in section 3.13.5.4 , push TRACKB inthe MPR-Main menu and ”center” the trackball position. After this, switch off theMOVE MODE and invoke LATCH to being in the ” ON ” state (white box). Select

”mode ” with the appropriate soft button to ”H+V” and adjust ”WIDTH ” to change theblocksize. Of course you can see changes only where motion appears in the pic-ture! So, when adjusting the ”WIDTH ” move a wipe border on screen or change the”SIZE ” of the Crop Key source (in example 3.13.5.4 this was Pattern1 from ME1).

You will see additional dynamic checkerboard effects on the border area.



3.14 Keyers menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

242

3.14 KEYERS MENU

For information to KEYERS menu please see section 2.6.



3.14 Keyers Menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

243



4. EXTRA Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

244

4. EXTRA

EXTRA (Extended Transition Recall Automatic) is a software package for storingand recalling switcher statuses and processes.

EXTRA thus permits storing and recalling individually prepared operating statusesand sequences with different background, key sources, borders, wipe pattern posi-tioning, coloring etc.

EXTRA is used for storing and recalling static settings (statuses, snapshots) andinterpolated timelines.

The snapshots and timelines are identified with numbers (Register 1 ... 99). Thenumbers 100 ... 999 are reserved for other applications (e.g. disk).

EXTRA can be operated in two ways:

operation via the keys of the EXTRA panel operation via the EXTRA menu, and operation with the Source Selection keys (EXTRA ME operation)

The number of keyframes in a timeline is only limited by the storage capacity of therespective switcher computer and the number of mixing levels and storable func-tions.

With the DD30 about 30 complete keyframes may be stored in one timeline. (DD20 :about 39; DD10 : about 54, and DD5 : about 59). If only the keyframes of one mixinglevel (ME1, ME2 or PP) are to be stored, the number of possible keyframes risesto 72.

The operator can edit a timeline in order to produce more sophisticated effects.

Note: The maximum memory available for a timeline is 64 kB. This corresponds to 37% of the total memory. The total memory in the electronics box RAM for snapshots and timelines is approx.173 kB.



4. EXTRADiamond digital DD20 / DD30

245

DEFINITION OF TERMS

SNAPSHOT (SNAP) is a switcher status or the status of a switcher part.

KEYFRAME (KF) is a static switcher status within one timeline.

TIMELINE (TIML) is a stored sequence of switcher statuses (keyframes).

DISSOLVE is a dissolve between static switcher statuses. The ana-logue values are dissolved, the switching functions areswitched at the end of the dissolve procedure.

DISSOLVE TIME is the time for dissolving between two static switcherstatuses.

STORE is the storing of a static switcher status.

RECALL is the reproduction of a stored static switcher status.

RECORD is the storing of keyframes to a timeline in real time.

EDITING (EDIT) is the creation or the processing of a timeline outsidereal-time.

PLAY is the play of a stored timeline.

TRAJECTORY is the ”trajectory” between keyframes.

HOTKEY are the 15 upper keys of the wipe pattern selection keypad (DD20 / DD30 only).

REGISTER is a memory location where a snapshot or a timeline canbe stored. Registers are identified with a numberbetween 1 ... 99.

REGISTER MODE is an input mode for the register number in the EXTRApanel, in which the number is entered in one digit(0 ... 9) or in two digits (10 ... 99) followed by functionalselections such as Enter, Cut or Auto.

BANK MODE is an input mode for the register number in the EXTRApanel. The bank number 0 ... 9 corresponds to the tensdigit of the register number. When the units digit of theregister number is entered, the corresponding snapshotor timeline is triggered immediately (hotkey).



4.1 EXTRA panel Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

246

4.1 EXTRA PANEL

The EXTRA panel has different functions in the Diamond Digital DD20/DD30 swit-

chers..

• Input of the transition durations (Trans dur) for transitions, DSK, Fade-to-Blackand EXTRA fading. For this the keys 0 ... 9 and the Enter key are used. For furt-her details please refer to the relevant sections.

• Input of figures in conjunction with the alphabetical keypad for text input.

• Operation of the setup functions. Here the Store, Bank and Edit keys are usedwith different functions. For further details please refer to section Setup .

• Operation of the EXTRA functions. Here the keys with double lettering have dif-ferent functions in the various operations.

The secondary lettering of the keys 0 ... 9 applies when existing timelines are

modified. The secondary lettering FREE of the Clear key applies when a regi-ster is selected.The secondary lettering FREE of the Clear key serves to selectan unassigned register.In the following instructions only the applicable function of the double letteringis mentioned.

This section of the operating instructions only describes the EXTRA operation inthe EXTRA panel. Further EXTRA operations using the data monitor are describedin the section EXTRA Menu .

EXTRA panel DD10

EXTRA

1 2 3 4

Transdur

Undo

7 8 9

Store Bank

4

1

5 6

2 3

0

Edit

DELMODINS

H TM TRTM TRAJ

VIEW

FREEEnterClearNEXTLOOP

Set up

Cut Auto

T I M L 9 9 E X T R A




247

EXTRA panelDD20/DD30

EXTRA

Stop

Stop

Rev

7 8 9

Store Bank

4

1

5 6

2 3

0

FlipFlop

Next

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5

Edit

DELMODINS

H TM TRTM TRAY

VIEW

FREEEnterClearNEXTLOOP Cut Auto

1 2 3 4

EXTRA

Transdur

Undo

ME1

ME2

PP

Col

Misc

Reloc

BGD




248

4.1.1 DISPLAY

If no editing function or store function is selected, the 16 digit display of the EXTRApanel may show the following indications:

No register is selected. The register is empty.

Register 24 is selected. The register is empty.

In Bank mode, bank 2, position 5 is selected (this corresponds toregister 24). Register 24 is empty.

Register 05 is selected. The register contains a snapshot and has noparticular name (a default name will be used).

As above but in Bank mode bank 0 with hotkey 5.

Register 05 is selected. The register contains a snapshot with thename ”ABCDEFGH”.The name can only be entered in the EXTRA menu.

As above but in Bank mode 0 with hotkey 5.

Register 16 is selected. The register contains a timeline and has noparticular name (a default name will be used).


Register 16 is selected. The register contains a timeline with the name”KLMNOPQR”.The name can only be entered in the EXTRA menu.


R E G X X

Display 1 Display 2 Display 3 Display 4

R E G 2 4

R E G B 2 4

S N A P 0 5 S 0 0 5 – – – –

S N A P B 0 5 S 0 0 5 – – – –

S N A P 0 5 A B C DE F G H

S N A P B 0 5 A B C DE F G H

T I M L 1 6 T 0 1 6 – – – –

T I M L B 1 6 T 0 1 6 – – – –

T I M L 1 6 K L M N O P Q R

T I M L B 1 6 K L M N O P Q R




249

4.1.2 DEFINE MEMO IN EXTRA-PANEL (DD20 / DD30 ONLY)

The EXTRA panel permits a rough but fast filtering for storing and recalling snaps-hots and timelines.

ME1

ME2

PP

Col

Misc

Reloc

BGD

In generating a snapshot or a timeline, the lighting keys show which switcherselections are stored. In recalling a snapshot or a timeline, the lighting keys showwhich switcher sections are affected by the stored functions. If the recalled sectionis smaller than the available target section, only the recalled section is affected.

Example:

Mixing level ME1 is stored. The entire switcher is ready for recalling. Only ME1 is affected, the other sections of the switcher remain unchanged.

The indication is also shown in the EXTRA menu under DEFINE MEMO.




250

4.1.3 RELOCATING TO A DIFFERENT MIXING LEVEL (DD20 / DD30 ONLY)

When a snapshot or a timeline is recalled, the Relocate function permits addres-sing a different mixing level (ME) than that used during storing, i. e. a relocation can

be switched.

This function is activated with the Reloc key.

Switch on Target ME

Press RELOC

(key lights up)

If several MEs are selected as source, theME with the highest number (PP = ME3) isused as a source.Switch on Source ME

The EXTRA menu always shows the source ME in Define Memo.




251

The functions of the keys including those in conjunction with Reloc can be seen from the following table:

Key Relocate OFFReloc key does not light up

Relocate ONReloc key lights up

ME1

Key does not light up

Key lights up

Mischebene ME2

is not stored or not restored

is stored or restored relocate to ME1

ME2


Key lights up

Mischebene ME1


is stored or restoredrelocate to ME2

PP


Key lights up

Mischebene PP


is stored or restoredrelocate to PP

COLBGD


Key lights up

Hintergrundfarbflächen


is stored or restored

no function

MISC


Key lights up

Sonstige AUX, DVE, Store


is stored or restoredno function




252

4.1.4 ENABLING AND DISABLING BANK MODE

The Bank mode in the EXTRA panel permits access to a stored snapshot or time-line with a single key (hotkey). The bank number is the tens digit of the register. The

hotkeys are the units digits of the register. The Bank mode may be enabled duringstoring but this does not have any particular benefit.

Hold the Bank key down and select the desired bank with the numeric keypad. TheBank key lights up. In the display a ”B” appears before the register number.

Example:S N A P B 0 5 S 0 0 5 – – – –

Press the lighting Bank key.

4.1.5 SELECTING A REGISTER DURING STORING

During the storing of snapshots or timelines the register to be used for storage mustbe selected. The procedure is the same for both cases.However, the indication in the display differs.

for snapshots STORfor Timelines EDIT

• If the register number is to be taken over that was shown before the actuationof the Store or Edit key, no further selection is necessary.

Note: In storing, the contents of the register may be overwritten,assuming that the logged-in USER has stored in the register.

• With the FREE key the next unassigned register can be selected.

• By entering a one – or two – digit number in the numeric key pad and confirmingwith Enter, any register may be selected. An incorrect entry can be cancelledby pressing Clear.

Note: In storing, the contents of an assigned register will beoverwritten, assuming that the logged-in USER has stored in the register.

EnablingBank mode

DisablingBank mode




253

4.1.6 SELECTING A REGISTER DURING RECALLING

When a snapshot or a timeline is recalled, there are several ways to select a corre-sponding register.

• If the register shown in the display is to be used, no further selection is neces-sary.

• To select the next free register, press the NEXT key.

• To select a particular register, enter a one- or two-digit number with the numerickeypad.If a two-digit number is entered (e.g. 15), the related bank (1) appears in the dis-play when the first digit (1) has been entered. The desired register (15) appears

after the input of the second digit.The input of the figures need not be confirmed with Enter. However, the confir-mation with Enter avoids an erroneous entry of too many digits.Errors can be deleted with Clear provided Enter has not be pressed before.




254

4.1.7 STORING A SNAPSHOT

Set switcher

Press STORE

Press ENTER

Select register

DEFINE MEMO

Set

S T O R ? 1 7

Example:

Register 17 was selected before.

S T O R ? 2 4

Register 24 was selected forstoring.

S N A P 2 4 S T O R E D

Indication for about 1 second, if

S N A P 2 4 S 0 2 4 – – – –

the register was assigned, a short

indication shows what was erased.

(DD20 / DD30 only)DEFINE MEMO

Set

(DD10 only)

If data monitor is present

A Default Name (e.g.is assigned.

S024)




255

4.1.8 GENERATING A TIMELINE

Press EDIT

Press ENTER

Select register

DEFINE MEMO

Set

E D I T ? 1 7

Example:


E D I T ? 2 4

Register 24 was selected forstoring. If the register is assigned

Press

Set keyframe

STORE or INS

Press EDIT

lastKeyframe no

yes

an indication shows what will beerased.

E 2 4 R T E N D S T A

E 2 4 1 E N D K F

E 2 4 2 E N D K F

E 2 4 8 E N D K F

E 2 4 9 E N D K F

T I M L 2 4 C A L C U L A

T I M L 2 4 T 0 2 4 – – – –

short time

(DD20 / DD30 only)DEFINE MEMO

Set

(DD10 only)

If data monitor is present




256

The timeline is stored as a chain of keyframes with related dissolves between thekeyframes.

Keyframe1

Keyframe2

Keyframe3

Keyframen

tH

tT t

HtT

tH

.....

Store and INS first set

tH = waiting or hold time to 0 framestT = transition time to the Trans dur time set for Auto in the EXTRA panel.

The dissolve between the keyframes is set to smooth.

The EXTRA panel permits changing the following components of an existing time-line. For further details please refer to section Modifying a timeline in the EXTRA panel .

• Waiting or hold time (HOLD) with the HTM (hold time) key

• Transition time (TRANS) with the TRTM (transition time) key

• Trajectory (TRAJ) with the TRAJectory key

• Press INSert to insert a key frame before an existing key frame

• Inserting a keyframe with the INSert key

• Starting a loop (LOOP) with the LOOP key.

• Ending a loop (ELOOP) with the LOOP key.• Deleting a keyframe with the DELete key.




257

4.1.9 COMPONENTS OF A TIMELINE

In the EXTRA panel and the EXTRA menu, the components of a timeline are showndifferently as a consequence of the differing display options.

The components marked * can only be edited and modified in the EXTRA menu.A deletion with DEL is possible in the EXTRA panel.

Dissolve linearxx

ABC

xx

nn

xx

act

xx xx

xx

S015 ––––

xx

act nn

xxxx xx

Dissolve (S-Curve)

S T A R T E N D

EXTRA panel EXTRA menu Comment

xxxx xx

T R A J l i n e a r

T R A J s – c u r v

T R A J s m o o t h

T R A N S x x

S N n n

Dissolve (smooth)

K F n n

H O L D x x

*

i.e. dissolve in xx frames

Start and end of a timeline

Transition in xx frames

The keyframe is a snapshot(register nn) generated withINSERT STORED with nameand hold time in xx frames.

The keyframe is generated withINSERT ACTUAL (current switcher

status) with the hold time xx frames(nn = serial number)

Hold time with keyframes in frames

When calling the holdtime with the HTM key

When calling transitionwith the TRTM key

When calling trajectorywith the TRAJ key

When calling trajectorywith the TRAJ key

When calling trajectorywith the TRAJ key •

•

•

Change of trajectory mode bytoggling thr TRAJ key in theEXTRA control panel.




258

Timeline T001 (register nn)

n

T001

xx

L O O P n

EXTRA panel EXTRA menu Comment

L O O P 0

E L O O P

T L n n

W x x

G P I n

G P O n

*

*

*

*

*

Trigger event symbols for GPI – IN 1... 8 ,Time (xx:xx:xx:xx) or User. The

timeline waits for the correspondingeventActivate EDIT Enbl.

Event symbol for switching the GPOoutputs

Start – of – loop for n cycles

Start – of – loop for endless repetition

End – of – loop

Waiting time with xx frames




259

4.1.10 MODIFYING A TIMELINE IN THE EXTRA PANEL

The following procedure is used for all modifications of a timeline:

Press EDIT

Press ENTER

Select register

E D I T ? 1 7

Example:


E D I T ? 2 4

Register 24 is to be modified.

E 2 4 R T KS T A

T I M L 2 4 C A L C U L A

T I M L 2 4 T 0 2 4 – – – –

short time

F 1

Modify timeline as described below.Several different modifications are possible.

At the completion of all modifications:

Press EDIT




260

Note:

Modifications of an existing timeline always relate to the last keyframe indicated inthe display. In the following example this is keyframe 4.

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

The following actions are effective for the keyframe:Changing the keyframeDeleting the keyframeChanging the hold time of the keyframe

The following actions are effective before the keyframe:Inserting a new keyframeReturn-of-loop

The following actions affect the time belonging to the keyframe:Changing the transition timeChanging the trajectory

The keys and permit a successive selection of the individual events of a timeline.

With the View function enabled (key lights up), the switcher is switched to the statusstored in the keyframe (the outputs will be switched).

The keys ← and → permit a successive selection of the individual events of atimeline.

VIEW

← →




261

4.1.10.1 Changing the hold time

Select key frame

Enter hold time

Press HTM

Example:

K F 4 H O L D 0

Press ENTER

E 2 4 R T KS T A F 1

with numeric keypad

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

K F 4 H O L D 2 5

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

keys ← and →

Errors can be deleted with Clear.

Hold time of keyframe 4 is to bechanged.

Hold time of keyframe 4 is to be25 frames.




262

4.1.10.2 Changing the transition time

Select key frame

Enter transition time

Press TRTM

Example:

K F 4 T R 3 0

Press ENTER


with numeric keypad

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

K F 5 0

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

keys ← and →

Errors can be deleted with Clear.

Transition time of keyframe 4 isto be changed.

Old transition time is 30frames.

A N S

4 T R A N S

New transition time is 50frames.




263

4.1.10.3 Changing the trajectory

Select keyframe

Press TRAJ

Example:

K F 4 T R A J s m o o t h


E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

Select between:linear s – curve smooth

K F 4 T R A J s – c u r v

K F 4 T R A J l i n e a r

keys ← and →

When desiredtrajectory has been

selected, press Enter

Trajectory to keyframe 4 is to bechanged.

LINEAR Produces a linear movement at constant speed between the key-frames and sudden changes in the direction of movement and in thespeed at the keyframe (“ jerky behavior”).

S-CURV Produces a straight-line course of movement. The speed starts at 0,rises to maximum and falls again to 0. The direction changes with thekeyframes (speed curve).

SMOOTH Produces a smooth even movement avoiding sudden changes in

direction and speed. This makes the movement appear ”natural”. Thecontrols TENS, CONTI, BIAS, WEIGHT in the EXTRA panel are onlyeffective for Smooth Trajectory (shown on display: DD20 / DD30 only,shown on data monitor: DD10).




264

4.1.10.4 Changing a keyframe

Select keyframe

Press MOD

Example:


E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

keys ← and →

Keyframe 4 is to be changed.

The View function may be helpful during adjustment.

Set switcher as desired

Attention! The timeline will only be finally stored with theEDIT command at the end.




265

4.1.10.5 Inserting a new keyframe (INSert)

Press INS

Example:


keys ← and →

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

The View function may be helpful during adjustment.

The new keyframe has beeninserted as keyframe 4.The previous keyframe 4 now iskeyframe 5. The timeline is onekeyframe longer.

A new keyframe is to be

inserted before keyframe 4.

Select the keyframe before which the

new keyframeis to be inserted

Set switcher as desired

Attention! After INSERT, the sequence immediately after the

inserted key frame should be checked.

The cursor is positionedbetween keyframe 3 andkeyframe 4.




266

4.1.10.6 Inserting a loop in a timeline

The EXTRA panel only permits the insertion of an endless loop in a timeline. Loopswith predefined numbers of cycles 1 ... 9 can be entered in the EXTRA menu.

Entering a loopduring the generationof a timeline

Example:

E 2 4 3K F E N D

E 2 4 4 EK F L O O P

E 2 4 P EL O O L O O P

The timeline ends with the end of the loop.

The LOOP key lights up.

Enter last keyframe before the loop

Press LOOP

Enter first keyframe in the loop

Note:

If the LOOP key is disabled before the end of the timeline, the loop ends at that point. However, as the loop is endless, the end of the timeline will not be reached any more.




267

Inserting a loop into an existing timeline

Press LOOP

E 2 4 P 0 KL O O F 4


E 2 4 3 KK F F 4keys ← and →

The timeline ends with the end of the loop.

Select keyframebefore which theloop should start

Example:

The loop is to begin beforekeyframe 4

Note:

If the LOOP key is disabled before the end of the timeline, the loop ends at that point. However, as the loop is endless, the end of the timeline will not be reached any more.

Deleting a loop in an exisiting timeline

Press DEL


E 2 4 3 LK F O O Pkeys ← and →

Example:Shift LOOP indication

at the end of the display




268

4.1.10.7 Deleting a keyframe

Press DEL


E 2 4 3 KK F F 4keys ← and →

E 2 4 3 KK F F 4

Example:

Keyframe 4 is to be deleted

Keyframe 4 was deleted.The previous keyframe 5 now iskeyframe 4.The timeline is one keyframeshorter.

Select keyframeto be deleted




270

Dissolve functions depending on snapshot or timeline preselection (DD20 / DD30 only):

Key Snapshot preselected Timeline preselected

Auto Dissolve to the snapshot in thetime set with Trans dur. Playing the timeline in the timeset with Trans dur.

Cutor

Hotkey in Bank-mode

Recall the snapshots. Playing the timeline in thestored time.

Fader Dissolve to snapshot. Playing the timeline.

Note: Timelines that contain an endless loop, that have been generatedwith the Record function, or that are waiting for an event (GPI,Time) can only be recalled with Cut.

Key functions depending on snapshot or timeline preselection (DD20 / DD30 only):

Key Snapshot Timeline

STOP Cancelling dissolve. Cancelling playing.

STOPNEXT

Timeline pauses at next key-frame.

REV Reverse: timelines are playedin reverse direction.

FLIPFLOP

Timeline Play changes runningdirection at each end.

Note: The following timelines cannot be played in reverse direction:• time lines created with Record,• timelines with loops,• timelines into which snapshots or other timelines are embedded, and• timelines with trigger events (GPI, Time and User).

Entry of the Auto transition duration.

• Press Trans dur. The key lights up.• Enter transition duration with numeric keypad.

The time is indicated in the FRAMES display.• Complete the entry with Enter or Trans dur.

If you press this key, the status before the last recall of a snapshot or a timeline canbe restored even if several other keyframes have been performed in the meantime.

Trans dur

Undo




271

4.1.12 DELETING SNAPSHOTS AND TIMELINES

The procedure of deleting or clearing a register is the same for timelines and snaps-hots.

Press CLEAR C L R ? 2 4

S N A P C L E2 4 A R E D

Press ENTER T I M L C L E2 4 A R E D

R E G 2 4

Short time

or

Select other register

(1 ... 99)

Example:

The register entered after CLRis deleted.



4.2 Basic functions STORE, RECALLDiamond digital DD20 / DD30

273

Title line

Bank number (may be different to the bank number in the EXTRA panel)

Timeline functions

Timeline symbol, can be selected

Indication of available storage capacity

Snapshot functions

Transitionduration in FRAMES

Trajectory adjustmentPlease refer to selecton

Varios function

Submenu

Snapshot symbol, can be selected

Last function: Restoring status beforethe last RECALL, DISSOLVE or PLAY

Selected timeline or snapshot

with associated hotkey

Trajectory

with associated hotkey

The bank number indicated in the EXTRA menu can be changed as follows:

• Press EXTRA in the menu panel (DD20 and DD30 only) to select successively

Bank 0, 1, ... 9, 0, 1, ... .The bank number is independent of the bank number selected in the EXTRApanel.

• Provided the EXTRA menu is enabled, the relevant bank is enabled in the

EXTRA menu when the register or the bank is selected in the EXTRA panel.

• Clicking the EXTRA field with the mouse (possible for DD10 with data monitor).



Set desired

switcher status.

Select EXTRA menu

and bank number.

Press STORE.

Press desired hotkey

If not sure, check

DEFINE MEMO.

4.2 Basic functions STORE, RECALL Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

274

4.2.1.1 Storing Snapshots in Menu

If EXTRA menu is not selected

Store lights up and a running light in the hotkeysprompts the next step (DD20 / DD30 only).To store a new snapshot, select a free hotkey. Analready stored snapshot can be overwritten witha new one, provided the logged-in USER isOWNER.

Comments:

1. A timeline cannot be overwritten with a snap-shot. Any attempt will trigger a warning.

2. In order to disable the procedure without storing, press Store again.



Select EXTRA menu

And / or bank.


Press RCALL.


275

4.2.1.2 Recalling Snapshots in Menu (DD10: data monitor required)

If EXTRA menu is not selected

The current switcher settings are immediatelyreplaced by the settings stored under this hotkey.



Select EXTRA menuand / or bank

Press DISSOLVE


Press TIME

Enter new time

Press ENTER or TIME

or any fifth figure

to complete

the time entre


276

4.2.1.3 Dissolve

If a direct recall of the stored switcher settings is not desired, the Dissolve functioncan be used to execute a dissolve from the current switcher status to the status ofthe selected snapshot.

If not already selected in EXTRA menu

Dissolve lights up and a running light in thehotkeys prompts the next step(DD20 / DD30 only).

The dissolve begins, the dissolve time iscounted down.

The dissolve time can be modified with the following steps:

Time lights up and a running light in thenumeric keypad prompts the next step(DD20 / DD30 only).

Any time between 0 ... 9999 frames isadmissible.Press Clear to reset the time to 0.

The dissolve time is also used if a timelineis created with Learn.




278

• Auto key (in Transition panel)

Dissolve function (with Auto Transition Time) for snapshots selected on thePreset bank; orPlay function for timelines selected on the Preset bank.

• Fader (in Transition panel)Manual Dissolve function for snapshots selected on the Preset bank. The dis-solve time depends on the manual movement of the fader;orPlay function for timelines selected on the Preset bank. As soon as the faderis moved from its final position, the timeline is started.



Select EXTRA (ME)

Press CUT

Switch off

Press the desired key

on the Preset bank

to select the Snapshot.

on the Program bank

Press the desired key

to recall the snapshot.

EXTRA (ME)


279

4.2.2.1 Recalling Snapshots

Return to normaloperation withoutEXTRA.

In this mode snapshots are treated as video sources. Thus Program selection (=Recall) and Preset selection + Cut produce the same result. The recalled snapshotis indicated in the Program bank.



Select EXTRA (ME).

To cancel,

At the end of the dissolve the preselectes snapshot

Press AUTO

to start dissolve

Move fader from one

final position to the

other final position

becomes the program snapshot and vice versa.

Select snapshot

in Preset bank

Automatic Manual

press AUTO again.

Switch off EXTRA (ME)

after execution.


280

4.2.2.2 Dissolve

In addition to recalling, (automatic and manual) dissolves are possible. The AutoTransition Time corresponds to the duration of the automatic dissolve.The flip-flop principle permits a dissolve to be executed between snapshots. Themanual dissolve with the fader permits coupling analogue settings such as colorhue, key clip level, border width, wipe position etc. with the fader.

Return to normal operation without EXTRA.




281

4.2.3 USING THE KEYS IN THE EXTRA PANEL (DD20 / DD30 ONLY)

4.2.3.1 Storing Snapshots

Adjust switcher

Press STORE

Press ENTER

Select register

1 .. 99

Press FREE to select

the next free store




282

4.2.3.2 Recalling Snapshots

Select register

Press ENTER

CUT or AUTO

or fader

1 .. 99

indication in display




283



4.3 Basic functions EDIT, RECORD and PLAY Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

284

4.3 BASIC FUNCTIONS EDIT, RECORD, AND PLAY

4.3.1 CREATING A TIMELINE WITH EDIT

Press EDIT

Press ENTER

Select register

1 .. 99

Set keyframe

Press STORE

or INS

no

Press EDIT

last

yes




285

The timeline is stored as a chain of keyframes with associated dissolves betweenthe keyframes.

Keyframe1

Keyframe2

Keyframe3

Keyframen

tH

tT t

HtT

tH

tHtT

= hold time= transition time

.....

If you press Store or Ins, any tH is set at 0 frames. tT is entered together with thecorresponding keyframe. The duration of the timeline is the sum of all transitiontimes tT.The number of keyframes in a timeline is only limited by the storage capacity of therespective switcher computer and the number of mixing levels and storable func-tions.

With the DD30 about 30 complete keyframes may be stored in one timeline. (DD20 :

about 39; DD10 : about 54, and DD5 about 59). If only the keyframes of one mixinglevel (ME1, ME2 or PP) are to be stored, the number of possible keyframes risesto 72.

The operator can edit a timeline in order to produce more sophisticated effects. Forfurther information please refer to section EXTRA Editor .



Select EXTRA menu

Press PLAY

select desired hotkey

and / or bank.

e.g. T006


286

4.3.2 PLAYING A TIMELINE IN MENU

In order to play a timeline in real time, proceed as follows:

The selected timeline will start.

While a timeline is played, the menu display is as follows:

”Duration” indicates the total time of the timeline. ”Elapsed time” indicates the timethat has already been played. If you press Play again, you can cancel the playingprocedure.

NOTE If a timeline is e.g. GPI controlled, DURATION is unknown.



Select EXTRA menu

Press RECORD

and / or bank

Select desired hotkey

Execute desired

operation

select EXTRA menu

(if left)

Press RECORD

to end timeline


287

4.3.3 RECORDING A TIMELINE IN MENU

In Record mode the operating actions are stored in real time in the order of theiroccurrence. No interpolation is made.

Proceed as follows:

Record lights up and a running lightin the hotkeys prompts the next step.

Recording and time measurement startimmediately. If EXTRA ME operation isnot active, the associated EXTRA key

flashes.

It is not necessary to remain in theEXTRA menu.

For recorded timelines, Edit, Auto Play, Fader Play and Trajectory cannot be used.

A timeline generated in RECORD mode cannot be edited.



Select EXTRA (ME).

PLAY PLAY AUTO PLAY FADER PLAY

Select timeline

in the

Program bank.

Press CUT. Press AUTO.Move fader

from one limit po-

sition to the other

limit position.

Select timeline Select timeline Select timeline

in the in the in the

Preset bank. Preset bank. Preset bank.

DD20 / DD30 only

4.4 Basic functions PLAY, AUTO PLAY and FADER PLAY Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

288

4.4 BASIC FUNCTIONS PLAY, AUTO PLAY AND FADER PLAY

In addition to real-time Play, EXTRA ME operation also offers Auto Play (takes the

Auto Transition Time as timeline duration) and Fader Play (playing the timeline withthe fader). The fader path represents the timeline duration.



4.4 Basic functions PLAY, AUTO PLAY and FADER PLAY Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

289

As long as the timeline is running, this is indicated in the Program and Preset banks.

Comment:

The EXTRA menu also shows the Play function.

In Auto Play the elapsed time runs faster (more slowly) if the Auto Transition Timeis shorter (longer) than the original duration of the timeline. In Fader Play theelapsed time depends on the fader position and can even be reduced if the faderis moved back through the timeline.



4.5 Other functions in the EXTRA menu Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

290

4.5 OTHER FUNCTIONS IN THE EXTRA MENU

4.5.1 DELETE

Press the associated function key to delete snapshots or timelines. A running lightin the right wipe selection pad (hotkeys) prompts the selection of the snapshot ortimeline to be deleted.

Attention:

The stored snapshot or timeline is deleted immediately!Snapshots or timelines can only be deleted by the user who created them, i.e. thecurrently logged-in USER must be the OWNER of the timeline or the snapshot(recall with SHOW and selection of the register).



Press ASSIGN.

Select bank.

Operational Display

ASSIGN

of snapshot or timeline

to be moved

Press destination

FROM

ASSIGN

TO

ASSIGN

Select bank

step

Press hotkey

hotkey


291

4.5.2 ASSIGN

The Assign function permits the owner to change the positions of timelines or snap-shots in the preselection field or even move them to other levels (banks).

Running light in the hot-keys prompts the nextstep.

EXTRA key in the menupanel.

This changes the assignment. If the TO position is already assigned, the respectivesnapshots/timelines exchange their positions.




292

4.5.3 RENAME (only available by the owner)

With the Rename function you can give snapshots and/or timelines a name of upto 8 characters or figures (DD20 / DD30 only). If you press the associated functionkey, a running light in the right wipe selection keypad prompts the entry of thedesired storage location.

If you press the associated function key for the desired snapshot or timeline, aRename window with a new key assignment appears in the menu. Enter the newname with the wipe selection keypad.

The entered name is stored, the window is closed.

Press the associated function key to delete individual charactersin the entry line.Löschen von Zeichen in der Eingabezeile.

Press the associated function key to clear the entire entry line.

Press the associated function key to cancel the Rename proce-dure and to close the window.

OK

RUBOUT

CLEAR

CANCEL



ME1

ME2

PP+DSK

OTHER

EXIT

ALL

TOGGLE

(DD20 / DD30 only)

(DD20 / DD30 only)

Recall BGD HPT disable

ME1 ME2 PP


293

4.5.4 DEFINE MEMO

This menu indicates which switcher functions are stored in snapshots and time-lines. For this purpose, a symbolic representation of the switcher appears in themenu.

Press the associated function key to mark (highlight) functionalareas that are taken into account for storing the EXTRA snap-shots or timelines.

Cursor movement

Press the associated function key to enable or disable the func-tional unit marked with the cursor.

Press the associated function key to return to the higher orderEXTRA menu.

Press the associated function key to prohibit RECALL of BGDcrosspoints (in both ME and Layer mode!).

In this example, ME2+COLOR 2 are stored by EXTRA of ME2. The above exampledoes not include access to COLOR 2 so that COLOR 2 is unaffected if a snapshot

is called that was stored with this DEFINE MEMO.




295

Unit stored not stored

MATRIXAUXBUS

Set matrix points On Air informationNon-Sync information2nd-delegation keys

TRANSI

Automatic dissolve time AUTOLIMIT, LIMIT ONKEY CHANGEGPI ENABLE/ASSIGNNEXT TRANSITIONTRANSITION MODEBLACK PRESETNORMAL/REV, REVERSECURVEBACKGROUNDs, KEYsADD-parameter

AUTO TRANSITIONFader-positionFader direction of movementACTIVEAUTO PREVIEWTRANSITION PREVIEWEXTRAFADE TO BLACKTRANSFER MODEStatus GPI OUTPUTS

PATT

Basic wipesSIZEH-/V-MULTI, O, XPOS ON, Extended

Position valuesRATIO ON, valueSTRECHROT ON, mode, valueMOD ON, LOCK, MULTIMOD SHAPE, valueMOD, amplitudeBORDER ON, WIDTHSOFTNESS ON, valveSYMMETRY, valveMATTE, WASH, HUECHROMA, LUM,COMBINE

PATTERN PREVIEWUSER PATTERNDigipot-delegation

KEY +MASK

ModeCOUPLED / SEPARATE /

IDENTICAL (KEY BUS – KEY BUS)KEY INVERSMASK ONBORDER, OUTLINE,SHADOW,OPACITYCLIP, SOFTHUE, SELECTIVITYBORDER OPACITYMATTE WASH, HUE, (Fill and Border)CHROM, LUM (Fill and Border)AKA-window positionMASK INVERTFORCED FOREGROUNDPAINT CURSOR ONMASK TYPELEFT, RIGHT, TOP, BOTTOM

SIZE,

AutoKEY PREVIEW

LOGODigipot-delegation

MASK PREVIEWPAINTED MASK SHAPE

COL 1, 2 WASHHUE, CHROMA, LUM 2 x

Digipot-delegation

AUXBUS4, 5, 6(DD20/

DD30 only)

Set matrix points fromPVW, DVE (video + key),FxLoop-DVE1

On-Air, Non-Sync, 2nd,bus delegation




296

Unit stored not stored

AUXBUS 1...3

Set matrix points On-Air, Non-Sync, 2nd,bus delegation

EXT DVE Effect-no., actual position within effect

STORES Settings:Video store, Matte store,Mask store, Montage proc.

Video store of memorys




297

4.5.5 SHOW MEMO

This function shows the user which functions of the switcher are stored in the shap-shot or the timeline. The menu also contains additional information.

Press hotkey of timeline

Press SHOW.

or snapshot.

The following information can be seen from the menu:

Left window:

• Type of selected storage location with name (timeline or snapshot)

• Key address (number of bank with letter on key)

• Date and time of storingOwner (user who stored)

• Owner (user who stored)

• Total running time of timelines• Number of keyframes of timelines

In this example it is the timeline T001 which can be selected by pressing “J”. Thetimeline was stored by COMMON at 13.45 h on 14 Sept. 1994.



Select EXTRA menu

Press EDIT.

Press hotkey

of timeline for Edit.

and / or bank.

4.6 EXTRA Editor Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

298

4.6 EXTRA EDITOR

4.6.1 MODIFYING A TIMELINE CREATED WITH EDIT IN THE EXTRA PANEL

Note: The menus shown in this section are only examples. In prac-

tical operation different values may appear in the display.

With the Edit function you can

• modify timelines

• create new timelines.

Edit is selected as follows:

Let us assume, a timeline T009 was created with Learn. This timeline is to include7 keyframes and the dissolve time is to be 30 frames for each keyframe. The asso-

ciated EDIT menu is shown on the next page (the cursor was moved to keyframe4).In Edit operation, the individual keyframes are identified as ”act#” (=actual snap-shot).

In the example, the following operations are to be executed:

1. The contents of act#4 is to be changed.2. A trigger event ”Wait for GPI 1” is to be inserted.3. The GP output GPO 1 is to be triggered.4. One keyframe is to be deleted.5. A loop is to be inserted.

A more detailed description will be found on the following pages.




299

Timeline name

Total running time

Elapsed time from start to current cursor position

Available storage capacity

Delete current object

ON: Keyframe is calledand displayed on the

video outputs.OFF: Video outputs unaffected

Change current object

Endediting operation

Cursor movement Insert new object

Duration of objects

Objects

by keyframe selectionwith cursor.

in timeline



Storing the modified keyframes (current switcher status and new times)

Cursor movement

Please refer to selection ”Trajectory”.

Set new switcher

Press MODIFY ALL.

status.

Press OK.

Cancel without changing

The new contents of act4 is no stored.The window in the menu is closed.


300

Changing contents and duration of act#4



Selected trigger event

Select trigger event

Press

with the

Press OK.

Cancellation

The new contents of act4 is stored.The Trigger Event window is closed.

cursor keys.

is inserted before thecurrent cursor position.

Cursor for the selectionof the trigger eventInsertion of trigger event.


301

Inserting a ”Wait for GPI 1” before the object act#4

Insertion is always made before the cursor.

Comments:

USER is a special trigger event waiting for anoperator action. 00:00:00:00 indicates the triggertime (real – time clock). After the selection, the trig-ger time is entered with the numeric keypad. InPlay mode, the timeline waits until the real timehas reached the trigger time and then continues.



Note: (DD20 / DD30 only)Timelines with trigger events canot be played with AUTO or the fader. REVerse is not possible either.


302

The following figure shows a ”Wait for GPI 1” inserted before act#4. The triggerevent is indicated in the line above the keyframe.




303

Inserting a GPO 1 before object act#5

Selected trigger event

Press OK.

Cancellationis inserted before thecorrent cursor position

Cursor for the selectionof the trigger event

Insertion of

Move cursor to

Select GPO

with cursor keys.

5act

trigger event.

Press



Inserted GPO


304

GPOs are indicated in a line above the keyframe. The following menu will nowappear:




305

Deleting object act#5

act

Press DELETE

5

Object disappears,the numbering of thefollowing objectsis updated.

Move cursor to

5act




306

Inserting a loop

Press

Start-of-loop

The loop should be returned to

Any other position may also bethe start of the timeline.

selected.

Move cursor to

1act



Insertion Cancellation

Endless loop

Press OK.

of a loop


307

The loop counter (Repeat Count) is entered with the numeric keypad. The entry forthe loop counter may be 1 ... 9. If you wish an endless loop, select FOREVER (or 0).




308

The start – of – loop (two) is inserted. The end – of – loop will automatically be addedat the end of the timeline

Comment: Loops cannot be nested.

Attention! If the cursor is moved to the end of the loop < , the time elapsedso far is indicated when moving back.

For a loop, the start of the loop must be selected first (i.e. the point to which it willreturn). Only then can the end be selected or modified. Please refer also to thedescriptions on the following pages.

As loops cannot be nested, – appears outside the loop to mark the start – of – loop – appears inside a loop to mark the end – of – loop.

Note: (DD20 / DD30 onlay)Timelines with loops cannot be played in REVerse. With FOREVER, playing with AUTO and the fader is no longer possible, either.



End-of-loop

Press

Move cursor to

5act


309

Setting end-of-loop before object act#5




310

The end – of – loop is now before object act#5.



Ends editing

Subsequently the original EXTRA menu appers again.

Press ENDEDIT

During the calkulation of the interpolationparameters, the display indecates thefollowing message:


311

Ending timeline editing



Continuation of playing without waiting for GPI 1.

The total running time is unknown onaccount of the ”Wait for GPI” event.


312

While the newly created timeline is played, the display shows the following informa-tion:

When ”Wait for GPI1” is reached, the sequence is interrupted and the switcherwaits for the GPI1 input pulse.




313



Press EDIT.

End editing

Select free hotkey.The display shows the new timeline.

4.6 EXTRA editor Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

314

4.6.2 CREATING A NEW TIMELINE IN MENU

The following example shows how a new timeline (T006) is created.

This timeline contains • previously stored snapshots• a previously created timeline

• trigger time, trigger event.



Insertion of a previously stored

Press STORED.

The selection field with the titled hotkeysis displayed in the menu. If the desired hotkeyis not in this bank, you can select a different

snapshot or timeline.

bank by pressing ”Bank” in the EXTRA panel.


315

Inserting a previously stored snapshot



Press hotkeyIn this example, snapshot ”S001”.

of the

Press OK.

desired snapshot. A new window appears and prompts the entryof the transition and the hold time.To facilitate operation, default values for transi-tion duration (25 or 30 frames) and hold time(0 frames) are offered. Any value between0 ... 9999 frames can be entered.

In this example a transition time of 30 framesis entered.


316




317

The snapshot has now been inserted in the new timeline.

Note:

Timelines with ” stored ” snapshots cannot be played in REVerse

(DD20 / DD30 only).



Press WAIT.

Press OK.

Insertion of a waiting time (enter time with the numeric keypad).

The symbol10

appears in the timeline.

The WAIT window appears and prompts theentry of a waiting time. The numeric keypadcan be used to enter waiting times between0 .... 9999 frames.


318

Inserting a waiting time WAIT (especially in combination with DVE rise)

In the meantime GPO 8 has been inserted.After this GPO, a waiting time is to be inserted.



Press OK.

Select the timecodedummy with the

cursor keys.

Press

Enter time with thenumeric keypad.e.g. 17:30:00:00


320

Inserting a trigger time(In the meantime a timeline recall for T007 has been programmed)

Now the trigger time is to be set.




321

The trigger time has now been inserted. In addition two further snapshots S002 andS003 have been inserted afterwards. The last has a hold time of 10 frames.

Note:

If an object to be inserted is stored in a different bank, press the Bank key in the EXTRA control panel to switch to this bank.

Attention! The values indicated in the Total and the Cursor field do notinclude the duration of the inserted timeline T007.




322

Changing snapshots, modifying the times of ”S003”(transition time 100 and hold time 0)

Press OK.

Move cursor

Press MODIFY.

to S003.

The display shows a window where thetime values can be modified with thenumeric keypad.

Selected snapshotcan be replaced byanother one.




323

After the modification, the following timeline is indicated in the display.

Press ENDEDIT



17:3000:00

While the timeline is played, the display shows the following information:

Press CONTINUE to continue playing without reaching the trigger time.

Time of the internal RTC module on the E-Box controller.


324

When the stored timeline is played, EXTRA waits for the trigger time.



STORED

INSERT

DELETE

WAIT

CHANGE

ACTUAL

VIEW


325

4.6.3 OVERVIEW OF EDIT FUNCTIONS

Cursor movementThe current cursor position is marked black.The symbol under the cursor marks the current object.

Serves to select a window which depends on the currentobject. Most of these windows are identical to the Insert win-dows.These windows were shown in the previous examples.

Insertion is always made before the cursor position

– Waiting time in frames (0 ... 9999)

– Previously stored snapshot with given transition time tT andgiven hold time tH.The transition is always linear.

– Previously created timeline

Comment:These snapshots and timelines may be modified separately.However, they may not be deleted or re-assigned in the EXTRAmenu.

– Inserts the current switcher status as keyframe act#,together with transition and hold times.The transition will be influenced by the Trajectory settings.

– Trigger event

– GPO

– Start-of-loop and end-of-loop

Serves to delete the current object or the current keyframe.(only available by the owner)

If View is OFF, the timeline can be edited without changing theswitcher status.If View is ON, the respective snapshots (keyframes) are called,when the cursor is moved.Thus the video monitors show the stored status.




326

4.6.4 OVERVIEW OF ALL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS

xx

ABC

xx

nn

xx

act

n

T001

xx xx

xx

ABC

xx

act nn

xx

xxxx xx

Start and end of a timeline

Dissolve (s-curve), i.e. a transition between keyframesin xx frames.

Dissolve (smooth)

Snapshot, creates with Insert Stored under the nameABC and the hold time of xx frames.

Snapshot, created with ACTUAL and with a hold time of xx frames.

Event symbol for GPI, time (xx:xx:xx:xx) and User.The timeline waits for the respective event.

Event symbol for switching the GPO outputs.

End – of – loop

Playing a timeline, created with INSERT STORED

Waiting time of xx frames

Start-of-loop, loop counter with n repetitions.

(n = ”–” means ”forever”)



S xxx

25 0


327

4.6.5 NOTES AND COMMENTS

1. ”Actual” and ”Stored” snapshots should not be mixed in one timeline, althoughthis is possible.

2. With View ON you can convert a ”Stored” snapshot to an ”Actual” snapshot. – Insert the stored snapshot. – Move cursor to this snapshot. – Press Insert Actual. – Delete stored snapshot.

3. If a given keyframe is needed as single snapshot, proceed as follows: – Edit timeline with this keyframe (View ON). – Move cursor to this keyframe. – Leave editor by pressing End Edit. – Store a snapshot with Store.

4. Sometimes it is useful to execute a transition to a snapshot (transition durationtogether with the snapshot on one key).This can be done very easily by creating a timeline with Edit which only containsone stored snapshot.

5. The functions Fader Play (DD20 / DD30 only) and Auto Play have certain limita-tions

– Fader Play and Auto Play do not work with timelines that contain triggerevents ( ), endless loops (FOREVER) or stored timelines.

– Fader Play reverse is ignored if the timeline contains stored snapshotsand/or loops.



4.7 Trajectory Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

328

4.7 TRAJECTORY

TypCurve example

With the trajectory types and the associated adjustment options, the user canchange the course of movements between the keyframes of a timeline. This canbe clearly seen when the timeline changes the wipe position. The trajectory set-tings are stored automatically when

– a keyframe is entered in Learn – an actual keyframe is inserted or changed in Edit.

Each keyframe may have a different trajectory setting which describes the transi-tion to the next keyframe.The trajectory controls TENS, BIAS, CONTI, WEIGHT are adjusted with the digi-pots. The function keys below the respective bars can be used to set the value to”50%” which is indicated with an arrow. The different trajectory types are selectedwith the function key or with the mouse (DD10) below the indication. The followingtrajectory types are available:

LINEAR Produces a linear movement at constant speed between the key-frames and sudden changes in the direction of movement and in

the speed of keyframe.

S-CURV Produces a straight – line course of movements. The speed startsat 0, rises to maximum and falls again to 0. The direction changeswith the keyframes.

SMOOTH Produces a smooth even movement avoiding sudden changes indirection and speed. This makes the movement appear ”natural”.The controls TENS, BIAS, CONTI, WEIGHT are only effective forSmooth Trajectory.



act 1 act 2 act 3

act 2

act 1 act 3

4. 7 Trajectory Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

329

To describe how Smooth Trajectory mode works and how the user can modify it,the following example describes a timeline with 3 keyframes in which the wipe posi-tion e.g. of ME1 changes (the positions are shown below).

Wipe = small rhombus

– Set ME1 so that the monitor shows the positioned wipe as displayed abovein act#1.

– Select EXTRA menu. – Verify that ME1 is enabled in DEFINE MEMO. – Verify that TIME is not 0 (try 12 frames). – Set all trajectory modifiers to normal. – Set the trajectory type to SMOOTH. – Press Learn and select a storage location (hotkey). – Set ME1 so that it corresponds to the above act#1. – Press STORE to enter the first keyframe.

– Set positioner so that it corresponds to the above act#2. – Press STORE to enter the second keyframe. – Set positioner so that it corresponds to the above act#3. – Press STORE to enter the third keyframe. – Press Learn to complete the storing of the timeline. – Play the timeline.

In order to display the resulting trajectory, the three keyframes are combined in onepicture. Use the STORE-function in the menu.




330

With normal setting (50%) of the trajectory modifiers TENS, BIAS, CONTI, andWEIGHT, the following course of movements results:

The following describes the influence of each control separately. For more creativetimeline design you can experiment with the controls and/or combine them.

As the trajectory controls are not effective for the first and the last keyframe, thisexample only shows the modification of the values of the second keyframe (act#2).

The procedure is as follows:

– Press Edit and select the hotkey of this timeline. – Verify that View is enabled. – Go to act#2 with the function key (act#2 is black). – Press Change (a large window appears with the bars of the trajectory modifiers). – Set all modifier to 50%. – Set modifier of the respective example to the indicated value and press OK to enter the new value. – Press End Edit to end editing. – Press hotkey PLAY to play the result.




331

4.7.1 TENS (TENSION)

This control modifies the curvature of the trajectory. The curve may be pointed. Anegative curvature results in a loop.

The other trajectory controls remain in ”50%” position.

ca.18 %

ca.66 %

modify




332

4.7.2 BIAS

This control influences the direction of the trajectory at the keyframe. The anglebetween entry and exit is 180°.

The other trajectory controls remain in ”50%” position.

ca.27 %

ca.72 %

modify

If the wipe pattern (rhombus) is to leave the image area (beyond the margin),EXTEND POS must be enabled in the corresponding wipe generator.




333

4.7.3 CONTInuity

This control serves to produce a kink at the keyframe. The angle between entry andexit is no longer 180°. The speed rises and produces a ”hop” (jumping ball).

The other trajectory settings remain in ”50%” position.

ca.24 %

ca.70%

modify




334

4.7.4 WEIGHT

This control serves to change the speed at the keyframe. The flow of the curve alsochanges.

The other trajectory settings remain in ”50%” position.

ca.24 %

ca.70%

modify

Approx. 24% Slow movement before the key framefast movement after the key frame

Approx. 70% Fast movement before the key frameslow movement after the key frame

ATTENTION! A ” jerk” may appear at the key frame.




335



4.8 Error messages Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

336

4.8 ERROR MESSAGES

” Not enough FREE space ” Cause: The EXTRA storage is too full to permit storing this (new) snapshot

or timeline.Remedy:Delete snapshots or timelines that are no longer required and storeagain with Store or Learn.

” You are not the OWNER ” Cause: You have tried to delete, assign or rename a snapshot or a timeline,

that was stored by another user.For safety reasons, this is not permitted.

” Contains deleted SNAPSHOT Cause: or timeline ignored ” A snapshot or timeline stored in this timeline has been deleted (or

assigned) in the meantime. A snapshot or timeline selected on thePreset bank has been deleted in the meantime (DD20 / DD30 only).

” Snapshot replaced by time- Cause:line or vice versa. Ignored ” . You have used a function that does not apply to the stored object, e.g.

Play for a snapshot.

” NAME already exists ” Cause:You have tried to rename a snapshot or a timeline using a name thatalready exists (in a different bank).Remedy:Select a different name.

” Nested PLAY ignored ” Cause:The currently played timeline contains a timeline and this timeline inturn contains another timeline.

” Cannot INSERT timeline Cause:into itself ” You have tried to insert the timeline you are currently editing as Stored

timeline. For safety reasons this is not permitted.

” More than 30 different analog Cause:values. Ignoring some of them.” You have changed an excessive number of analog values during this

Learn or Edit procedure. The limit has been set to avoid jerky move-ments while a timeline is played.

” Ignored because nothing Cause:enabled in DEFINE MEMO.” You have tried to store (Store or Learn) or to record (Record) when

no functions were enabled in DEFINE MEMO. This is ignored in orderto avoid empty snapshots or timelines.Remedy:Change DEFINE MEMO.



4.8 Error messages Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

337

” No EDIT during Remedy:AUTO TRANSITION ” . Select Edit after Auto Transition is completed.

” No EDIT during Remedy:AUTO TRANSITION or other Select Edit after Auto Transition or EXTRA Play/Dissolve is com-

EXTRA PLAY/DISSOLVE ” pleted.

” Cannot change DEFINE MEMO during LEARN,RECORD or EDIT ”

” DISSOLVE TIME for firstkeyframe is always 0! ”

” Ignored! No FADER play More possible error messages.backwards ” (Fader play: DD20 / DD30 only)

” Ignored! No FADER play because .......”

” Ignored! No AUTO play because .......”

” Ignored! No EDIT because RECORDED ”



4.9 EXTRA-VTR-Protokoll Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

338

4.9 EXTRA-VTR-PROTOKOLL

As of software version ”I” a new port protocol is available. This protocol permits areal-time control of switcher timelines by an editing system. The switcher emulates

a tape machine and presents timelines like a piece of recorded tape. Each positionin the timeline has a specific time code assigned to it. For the connection to the edi-ting system, a standard RS422 cable (1:1 assignment, pin-pin) is used. The con-nection at the switcher can be established directly at one of the three RS422 ports(port 1, 2 or 3). Please refer to the switcher installation manual.

Editor-Setup The switcher identifies to the editing system as a tape machine of the ”BVW-75P”type.In the editor setup the corresponding setting has to be made.

Switcher-Setup In the switcher setup (E-Box) the EXTRA-VTR protocol must be selected for the

relevant port.In case of DD20/30 switchers the remote control is enabled by the VTR Enbl key.

In case of DD5/10 switchers the remote control is released implicitly when the EditEnbl key is pressed.

Functioning A remote control is only possible if a valid timeline is selected at the switcher whichmeets the following requirements:The timeline must have a defined duration, i.e. – it must not contain an endless loop, – it must not contain a ”wait for GPI”.

The playing of timelines from the editor is subject to the same limitations as themanual playing with the fader (DD20 / DD30 only). – Timelines containing external snapshots (generated with ”insert stored”) can

only be played forward. – Timelines containing loops can only be played forward.

As a consequence timelines which are exclusively created by ”insert actual” com-mands should be preferred in connection with the VTR interface. If no timeline oran unsuitable timeline is selected, this is signalled to the editor as a tape unthreadstatus. In Sony editors, for example, this status produces the indication TOUT (tapeout).

If the switcher is not released (”EDIT Enbl” not active) this is signalled to the editoras a LOCAL state.

The start of a timeline always is 10 hours (timecode 10:00:00:00). In effect prerollthis avoids possible problems caused by time code wrap around. All time codes

between 00:00:00:00 and 10:00:00:00 position the timeline at the start.

VTREnbl

EditEnbl



4.9 EXTRA-VTR-Protokoll Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

339

At the end of the timeline the time code continues, yet the switcher status is unaf-fected by any positioning beyond the end.

The editor can control the timeline with the normal operator tape motion controls(e. g. B. Stop, Play, Shuttle, Jog, Cue etc.).

In NTSC systems the VTR emulation operates in Non-Drop-Frame mode.



5. Application Notes Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

340

5. APPLICATION NOTES

5.1 LOADING FLASH SOFTWARE FROM DD FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

The software permits loading updates (FLASH software) directly from the floppydisk drives of the switcher. This eliminates the need to connect a PC for the loadingprocedure. This mode is only possible if EPROM type PR752A (or higher) isinstalled in the switcher control panel and if EPROM type PR695A (or higher) isinstalled in the switcher E-box .

There are two ways of loading the FLASH software with the internal (DD20/DD30)or the external (DD5/DD10) floppy disk drive:

SELFLOAD Selfloading procedure of a controlpanel with own floppy disk drive.

LOAD FOREIGN DEVICE From a control panel that is in theapplication and has its own floppy diskdrive, the software can be loaded intoany device in the network (E-box orpanel without disk drive).

Starting SELFLOAD

In case of a control panel that (as a result of an EPROM change) is unable to returnto the operating status, it is sufficient to insert a floppy with a control panel LOC fileinto the floppy disk drive and then trigger a reset (controller board). The loading pro-cedure is started automatically.

If a control panel already is in the application, a reloading of the software can bestarted in the SETUP menu (EXTRA panel).

SETUP menu option

L O A D S O F T W A R E : >

In the subloop the options

LOAD MY PANEL for ”Selfload” and

LOAD E-BOX MASTERLOAD E-BOX SLAVELOAD OTHER PANEL for ”Load foreign devices”

can be selected.




341

If LOAD MY PANEL is confirmed, the selfloading procedure is started.

The selfloading procedure comprises a test and a loading procedure that areexecuted successively. In the test procedure (approx. 5 minutes) the date on thefloppy disk are verified for safety purposes. This is signalled by a cyclical beep

sound.The loading procedure (approx. 5 minutes) is signalled by a cyclical long beepsound and the ”running” of the controller status LEDs.The loading procedure is completed when the control panel executes a RESTART.

Starting LOAD FOREIGN DEVICE

If the control panel is already in the application, a foreign device loading procedurecan be started in the SETUP menu (EXTRA panel).

Note: It is assumed that only the device to receive the software is active in the Cheapernet. Switch off all devices that are not involved before the foreign device loading procedure is started and press the reset button

on the control panel controller afterwards.

Setup Menu optionL O A D S O F T W A R E : >

In the subloop the following foreign devices can be selected:

LOAD E-BOX MASTERLOAD E-BOX SLAVELOAD OTHER PANEL

If one of the submenu options is confirmed, the foreign loading procedure is started.

As described above, the loading operating itself comprises a testing and a loadingprocedure that are executed successively. In this case both procedures are sig-nalled with a rotating activity indication in the EXTRA display. The EXTRA displaywill also show any error messages.

The loading procedure is completed when the newly loaded device executes aRESTART. In the control panel the EXTRA display shows the submenu optionexecuted last together with the indication DONE.

Floppy disk contents

In line with the BTS designation conventions for LOC files, only files with the follow-ing names can be loaded in the switcher:

Control panel F*.LOCE-box master M*.LOCE-box slave S*.LOC

All LOC files must be in the root directory of the floppy. In this operation only the firstthree LOC files on a floppy can be loaded.




342

5.2 INPUT ASSIGNMENTS (ON SMALL PANELS)

Current assignment limitations (For Software versions up to Release ”H”):

Depart from descriptions in the DD5 / DD10 Operations Manuals there is actually

no ”ASSIGN” menu button in the INSTALLATION \ IDENT menu of these panels.So, with these panels it wasn’t possible to gain access to physical input numbersgreater than the maximum count of D5 / DD10 E-Box inputs. This especially turnsout as a drawback when a user operates a number of panels and one (or more)E-Box(es) in a Multi-Panel configuration. In case there is a desire for an access toinputs # 17-32 of a large E-Box this could not be accomplished on former Softwarereleases. Since release ”I” there is still no possibility to directly control the assign-ment for greater input numbers, but BTS will now supply users of network environ-ments with an elegant solution to that problem. The solution is: Copy of ASSIGN-files from one panel to another. These Application Notes will show an example ofhow this is done and what restrictions will apply.

5.2.1 PREMISES

5.2.1.1 STANDARD BUTTON ROW INDEXING

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Standard *)

Key IndexÁ Á

Á Á

1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

2Á Á

Á Á

3Á Á Á

Á Á Á

4Á Á

Á Á

5Á Á Á

Á Á Á

6Á Á

Á Á

7Á Á Á

Á Á Á

8Á Á

Á Á

9Á Á Á

Á Á Á

10Á Á

Á Á

11Á Á Á

Á Á Á

12Á Á

Á Á

13Á Á Á

Á Á Á

14Á Á

Á Á

15Á Á Á

Á Á Á

16Á Á

Á Á

17Á Á Á

Á Á Á

18

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD 5 Á Á

Á Á

I 1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 2 Á Á

Á Á

I 3Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 4 Á Á

Á Á

I 5Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 6 Á Á

Á Á

I 7Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 8 Á Á

Á Á

BgdÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Blk Á Á

Á Á

I 9Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 10 Á Á

Á Á

I 11Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 12 Á Á

Á Á

VidÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á ÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD10 Á Á

Á Á

I 1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 2Á Á

Á Á

I 3Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 4Á Á

Á Á

I 5Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 6Á Á

Á Á

I 7Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 8Á Á

Á Á

I 9Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 10Á Á

Á Á

I 11Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 12Á Á

Á Á

BgdÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Blk Á Á

Á Á

I 13Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 14Á Á

Á Á

I 15Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 16

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD20Á Á

Á Á

I 1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 2Á Á

Á Á

I 3Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 4Á Á

Á Á

I 5Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 6Á Á

Á Á

I 7Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 8Á Á

Á Á

I 9Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 10Á Á

Á Á

I 11Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 12Á Á

Á Á

I 13Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 14Á Á

Á Á

I 15Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 16Á Á

Á Á

Bg1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Bg2

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD30Á Á

I 1Á Á Á

I 2Á Á

I 3Á Á Á

I 4Á Á

I 5Á Á Á

I 6Á Á

I 7Á Á Á

I 8Á Á

I 9Á Á Á

I 10Á Á

I 11Á Á Á

I 12Á Á

I 13Á Á Á

I 14Á Á

I 15Á Á Á

I 16Á Á

I 17Á Á Á

I 18

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Standard *)

Key IndexÁ Á

Á Á

19Á Á Á

Á Á Á

20Á Á

Á Á

21Á Á Á

Á Á Á

22Á Á

Á Á

23Á Á Á

Á Á Á

24Á Á

Á Á

25Á Á Á

Á Á Á

26Á Á

Á Á

27Á Á Á

Á Á Á

28Á Á

Á Á

29Á Á Á

Á Á Á

30Á Á

Á Á

31Á Á Á

Á Á Á

32Á Á

Á Á

33Á Á Á

Á Á Á

34Á Á

Á Á

35Á Á Á

Á Á Á

36

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD 5Á Á

Á Á

BgdÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Blk Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á


Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD10Á Á

Á Á

VidÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

BgdÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Blk Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á


Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD20 Á Á

Á Á

Blk Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 17Á Á

Á Á

I 18Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 19Á Á

Á Á

I 20Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 21Á Á

Á Á

I 22Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 23Á Á

Á Á

I 24Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 25Á Á

Á Á

I 26Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 27Á Á

Á Á

I 28Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 29Á Á

Á Á

I 30Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 31Á Á

Á Á

I 32Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Vid

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD30Á Á

Á Á

I 19Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 20Á Á

Á Á

I 21Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 22Á Á

Á Á

I 23Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 24Á Á

Á Á

Bg1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Bg2Á Á

Á Á

Blk Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 25Á Á

Á Á

I 26Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 27Á Á

Á Á

I 28Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 29Á Á

Á Á

I 30Á Á Á

Á Á Á

I 31Á Á

Á Á

I 32Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Standard *)

Key Index

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

37Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

38Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

39Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

40 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

41Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

42 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

43Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

44 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

45Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

46 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

47Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

48 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

49Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

50 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

51Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

52 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

53Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

54

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD 5Á ÁÁ Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ Á Á Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ ÁÁ Á ÁÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD10Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á


Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD20Á Á

Á Á

Mp1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Mp2Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á


Á Á Á Á Á Á

DD30 Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

M1k Á Á Á

Á Á Á

M2k Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

VidÁ Á

Á Á

Mp1Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Mp2Á Á

Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Bg1Á Á

Á Á

Bg2Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Blk

Bgd = Single Color GeneratorBg1/2 = Color Generator 1/2Blk = BlackVid = Video Store (MEM)Mp1/2 = Montage Processor Channel 1/2M1k, M2k = ME1-PVW/Key, ME2-PVW/Key

...all other blank fields appear as blanked Mnemonics on the panel.

*) With BLACK_BUTT (in Setup Menu) being on the right side.




343

5.2.1.2 NETWORK EXAMPLES

5.2.1.3 APPLICATIONS

NETWORK FOR INDEPENDENT STUDIOS / EDIT SUITES:

Basics for this application will be big edit suites that many users have to time share.For example you could have setup a large editor, cameras, up to two DVEs, oneor more CGs, Disk Recorders and a number of VTRs to the big unit to perform (pre-)productions. Supposed the small system is installed in another room with no livesources (cameras.....) connected, the editor can later move on to the small postproduction room to finalize the edit with the material that already is on tape. He can

copy his disk stored ”user input setup” from the DD30 to the DD10 panel to maintainthe order of connected inputs and keep the big room free for live shots etc...

DUAL PANEL NETWORK FOR OB-VAN PRODUCTIONS:

Supposed you have live productions on the DD20 panel (with a DD30 E-Box) andwant to do a small production with different cuts at the same time, you need to haveaccess to all E-Box connected sources. For the user ’s convenience it is now possi-ble to ”download” a specific 32 input button assignment to the DD10 panel and haveaccess to any 16 of all sources.




344

When using the DD10 panel for a small post production you have it is possible toaccess each of the DD30’s-E-Box MEs, one at a time. The input settings then followthe assignments that were made for the MEs, provided this setup was copied fromthe DD20 panel to the DD10 panel.

5.2.1.4 WHAT WILL BE COPIED ?

When copying Software structures represented by ASSIGN-Files from one panelto another it is always a transfer of setup information for all assignable modules ofthe biggest DD-family member (DD30).

No matter if the panel is small or large, the assignment of crosspoints will be execu-ted as described in the tables of 5.2.1.1. by overwriting target button row index loca-tions with data from the source setup.

For example:

– If you start the copying process with copying factory D10 assignments to

a DD30 panel,Inputs 20 to 24, BGD1, BGD2 and all previous assignments for Inputs 26 to 32 will be blanked in the mnemonics of the DD30 panel.

– If you start it vice versa (DD30 panel – > DD10 panel) BGD and BLACK on the DD10 panel will be overwritten with Input 13 and 14 and so on (...see appropriate rows forDD10 and DD30 in tables 5.2.1.1.).

Multi-System-Network

If your DD10 panel only has access to its own dedicated E-Box it is tied to settingsthat belong to ME1 of a copied external configuration.

NOTE: To avoid confusion it is recommended that the source DD30 panel will

have common assign ments for all ME ’ s or AUX rows (INSTALL \ IDENT INPUT \ Assign All) . Otherwise it may happen that a special assignment setup that was only made in the DD30 ’ s PP or ME2 module will have no effect on the DD10 panel after copying!

Multi-Panel-Network

If two (or more) panels are connected to one E-Box the user determines to whichE-Box module he gains access. So a DD10 panel can have ACCESS to ME1, ME2or PP of a DD30-Electronics box. Depending on the module selected (ME...), theassignments correspond to the appropriate ME. I. e. Assignments will changewhen the user gains access to another ME.

NOTE: ME2 and PP factory settings for a DD10 panel are equal to the factory settings of a DD30 panel.

5.2.1.5 STATUS OF COUPLED KEY SIGNALS

If, for instance DD20/30’s assignment has video on input 1 – 16 and correspondin-gly coupled Key signals on inputs 17 – 32, this configuration can directly be con-trolled by the factory assignment of a DD10 panel, connected to a DD20/30-E-Box.

”Assignment copy” will not be necessary for this.

Let’s assume input 1 is a video fill signal and input 17 its corresponding, coupledKey. When this video (1) is selected on a DD10 panel you can use the Keyer in

”COUPLE / SPLIT” mode and the appropriate E-Box coupled Key signal (17) willinstantly be routed to the corresponding Key-source input.




345

5.2.1.6 RESET A PANEL ASSIGNMENT TO FACTORY SETUP

Once a setup of larger panels (DD20/30) is copied to a smaller (DD5/10) panel theold configuration is overwritten as you already know. Due to the missing”ASSIGN”-Button in the DD10 IDENT INPUT menu it seems not to be possible toget back to the old setting.

But the following workaround makes it happen directly from the panel:

NOTE: Invoke the SETUP menu (in Number Block), step through to ” BLACK BUTT ” and change the location with the ” EDIT ” button. Pushing EDIT has to be done one time at least or two times if you want to have the BLACK BUTTON at its previous location.

Changing the location of ”BLACK BUTT” resets to default settings, toaccomplish the above mentioned functionality.

5.2.2 COPY PANEL ASSIGNMENTS

It is always recommended to LOGIN as COMMON on the larger Panel providedwith a display.

Only this way copied assignments will have effect after the file transfer to the targe-ted DD5/10’s ACCESS [COMMON]-Directory. In the ”FILE” menu only files thatbelong to the currently logged in user and shared files will show up.

NOTE: For more detailed information on the ” DISK \ FILE ” menu refer to chapter 3.6 of DD ’ s Operational Manuals.

In practice there are two possibilities to copy files from one device to another.

– One is to push a file from a source to a target and the other is to

– get a file by pulling it from the source device.

These two methods are described in 5.2.2.1. and 5.2.2.2., with certain restrictionsthat apply to the push method.

5.2.2.1 DD5 and DD10 without VGA(EGA)-Monitor (push file)

In this configuration it is not possible to change the USER. The default user is setto COMMON.

Prepare the wished assignment on the large (DD20/30) panel.

Take into account that the small panel’s (DD5/10) button rows will be overwrittenaccording to the Index table listed in 5.2.1.1.

NOTE: BGD and BLACK function may be overwritten!

Attention:




346

Step to ”STATUS \ DISK \ FILE” menu and select TARGET PANEL first.

This is done in the active window by moving the highlighted bar with a single up/ downward arrow button and entering ”SELECT”.

E.g.:

NAME DEVICETYPE ADR VERSÁ Á

Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

D10-PANÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

d10 panÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

xÁ Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Fxxxx

Entry appears in upper window: D10-PAN (d10 -pan) [COMMON]

Select ASSIGN [COMMON] list entry for being the target.

E.g.:

NAME DEVICETYPE ADR VERS

Á Á

Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

ASSIGNÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

[COMMON]Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Then step to other Filebox by use of the right or left ARROW button.

Select SOURCE PANEL. If the source panel is the one you are working on, youwill find a ”me” entry in the 2nd right column of the source filebox.

E.g.:


Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á


Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

d30 panÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

xÁ Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

meÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Fxxxx


Select ASSIGN [COMMON] list entry of source panel.

E.g.:


Á Á

Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

ASSIGNÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

[COMMON]Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

NOTE: Before using the provided ” COPY ” button, observe the direction of the

copy direction arrow below the ” File ” -Header to make sure in which way copy will be performed!

Push ”COPY” and confirm upcoming message if everything is correct.

DD5 buttons (Index 1-20) will be assigned according to DD20/30 ’s appropriateentries.





347

5.2.2.2 DD5 and DD10 with VGA(EGA)-Monitor (get file)

In this configuration it is possible to change the USER. If the setup should be validfor a specific user only, this user has to be logged in under his name. Target opera-tions will only affect directories of this user. The default user is set to COMMON.

Prepare the wished assignment on the large (DD20/30) panel. Take into account that the small panel’s (DD5/10) button rows will be overwrittenaccording to the Index table listed in 5.2.1.1.

NOTE: BGD and BLACK function may be overwritten!

Step to Monitor menu ”STATUS \ DISK \ FILE” and select TARGET PANEL. Thisis indicated by a ”me” in the second right column and will be the small panel plusthe monitor you’re working on.The selection is done in the active window by moving the highlighted bar with a sin-gle up/downward arrow button and entering ”SELECT”.

E.g.:


Á Á

Á Á

Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

D10-PANÁ Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

d10 panÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

xÁ Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

me

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Fxxxx


Select ASSIGN [<USER>] list entry for being the target panel.

E.g.:


Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

ASSIGNÁ Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

[<USER>]Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Then step to other Filebox by use of the right or left ARROW button.




348

Select SOURCE PANEL, for instance a source DD20 or 30 panel.

E.g.:


Á Á

Á Á

>Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á


Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

d30 panÁ Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á

xÁ Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

me

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Fxxxx


Select ASSIGN [COMMON] list entry of source panel.

E.g.:


Á Á

Á Á

> Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

ASSIGN Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

[COMMON] Á Á Á

Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

Á Á Á Á Á Á

NOTE: Before using the provided ” COPY ” button, observe the direction of the copy direction arrow below the ” File ” -Header to make sure in which way copy will be performed!

Push ”COPY” and confirm upcoming message if everything is correct.






349




350

5.3 SIMULTANEOUS EDITOR- AND LIVE-USE

5.3.1 OPERATIONAL GOAL

A large Electronics-Box (DD 20/30) should be used for two tasks at the same time.

E. g. on one hand it is wished to control a specific module of the E-Box by an Editor,performing a post production while on the other hand it is wished to run a live showvia one shared E-Box.

5.3.2 NETWORK EXAMPLE

5.3.3 STANDARD SITUATION

In quite a number of installations a DD30 E-Box is used as a server with two panelsconnected to it. For instance in an OB-Van (Scanner) a DD20 Panel is used for thelive production, occupying ME2 and PPonly, while simultaneously ME1 is control-led either via a connected Edit System and an additional DD5 or DD10 panel (seefigure of 5.3.1.2.).

Of course the Editor can currently only be connected to an appropriate E-Box serialport. The setup for this port has to be done according to the procedures describedin the Operations und Installation Manuals.

In most applications the ”GVG200o” port protocol emulation is the choice.

To get a processed signal at DD’s PGM output and also to be able to use a DSKand the Fade-To-Black transition the Editor controlled ME1 is automatically selec-ted as crosspoint on DD’s Preset-Program Bus when no other precautions havebeen taken (ME2 by choice).

5.3.4 TECHNICAL BACKGROUND

When emulating a GVG200 on a regular basis, it is evident that editor control forquite a number of DD-specific operations is omitted since the original GVG switcherhardware is different.

As a standard application it is assumed that the DD-E-Box is running in a ONE-OPERATOR-ENVIRONMENT. When applying a GVG command for DSK or FTB




351

actions those hardware components residing in DD ’s PP-section are being used,with a background coming from ME1.

For a correct PGM output the ME1-Crosspoint must be set automatically!

With the restrictions that the editor will not be able to perform a DSK or FTB a possi-

bility exists to avoid the automatic access to the ME crosspoint button on DD’s PProw.

The before mentioned problem only occurs when the small and the large panel areoperated under an identical user name since the access to certain E-Box modulesis user specific!

Therefore the solution to this problem is as easy as elegant.

5.3.5 PROBLEM SOLUTION

The solution is: Login the two panels under different USER names.

NOTE: The standard LOGIN name via DD5/10 panel without display is ” COMMON ” .

You can either LOGIN as NEWXYZ1 on the larger Panel provided with a displayand remain as COMMON on the smaller panel.

This is the only possible way when the DD5/10 panel has no VGA (EGA) monitorconnected to it. The user name can be changed in the large panel ’s ”ACCESS”menu according to the procedures listed in the Operations Manuals (see sections3.4).

As another user you simple have to mark all the modules of the ME2 & PP sectionas ”EXCLUSIVE”. Then automatically the Live-Box has exclusive access to theseparts only.

NOTE: When INPUT ASSIGNMENT should be copied as described in section 5.2, push a file has to be performed.

Or remain to be LOGGED IN as COMMON on the larger Panel and change theUSER name to NEWUVW1 on the monitor display.

If the DD5/10 panel has a VGA (EGA) monitor connected to it, the user name canbe changed in the monitor ”ACCESS” menu according to the procedures listed inthe Operations Manuals (see sections 3.4).

As another user you simple have to mark all the modules of the ME1 section as”EXCLUSIVE”.

Automatically the connected editor is restricted to access these parts only since thecrosspoint button, the DSK and FTB belong to another user.

NOTE: When INPUT ASSIGNMENT should be copied as described in section 5.2, get a file or push a file can be performed.




352

5.4 EXTERNAL ROUTER INTEGRATION

5.4.1 OVERVIEW

In general there are 4 distinct ways for a setup of external routing switchers in conjunction with Diamond Digital switchers. Since there is no XBAR-RS422 port at theDD5/10 chassis, these application notes do not apply to the DD-Family membersDD5 and DD10!

5.4.2 SYSTEM EXAMPLES




353

5.4.3 POSSIBLE INTERFACES

As shown in the figures of 5.4.1.2 the following interfacing is supported.

A. • Router Crosspoints controlled by dedicated Control Panels only

• Automatic Mnemonic Transfer to DD

B. • Router Crosspoints controlled by DD-Aux-Bar

• No Mnemonic Transfer

C. • Router Crosspoints controlled by DD-Aux-Bar

• Mnemonics recalled from manually set up Lookup Table

D. • Router Crosspoints controlled by DD-Aux-Bar

• Automatic Mnemonic Transfer

NOTE: As already described in the Installation Manual external Routers have to support the specific communications protocols in order to allow MNEMONIC TRANSFER and remote setting of external crosspoints via DD ’ s AUX Bar. Due to the fact that either a dedicated Control Panel or a Studio Control System like ” JUPI- TER ” could take control over crosspoint selection in the external Router, it should be equipped with a separate RS422-Status Port in order to support an independent feedback for Mnemonics that have to be exchanged in the DD20/30 panel when another crosspoint is selected. Therefore you need two SERIAL RS422 links for a perfect systems integration (see figure D).




354

5.4.4 ROUTER INTERFACE GLOSSARY

ASCII PROTOCOL This is needed to control the crosspoints of an external Router.The Router must have means to interpret the commands that will be sent either bythe Diamond Digital (via XBAR-PORT), a Control Panel or a Studio Control System

(like JUPITER).

Communication with 9600 Baud, 8 bit, No Parity, 1 Stopbit.

XBAR PROTOCOL As opposed to older descriptions in Supplement 3 (as of Feb.’94) the binary formatof the Mnemonics Characters that the Router has to send appears as follows:

10010101 aaaaaaaa 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0ccccccc ccccccc

Only this format will support a 4 character display at DD ’s LEDs.

IDENT XBAR This must be setup in the Diamond Digital in order to receive and correctly placeMNEMONICS for signals being selected in an external Routing switcher. You needa Display at the DD to do this configuration in the \ INSTALLATION \ CONFIGPANEL menu.Such an external crosspoint is indicated with a leading hatch (pound) sign ( ”#”).

EXTERN XBAR If the Router doesn’t support a second Interface Port or the Mnemonics Protocol,the Mnemonics in the DD20/30 can be read out from up to 48 entries of a lookupta-ble (in DD-Memory).Such an external crosspoint (without Mnemonics transfer) is then indicated with aleading DOLLAR sign (”$”).

For further set up information please refer the Installation Manual.




355




356

5.5 DOWNSTREAM KEYING WITH DEDICATED FADER

5.5.1 APPLICATION

Sometimes it is wished not only to ”cut” in a DSK or to do an ”Auto-Transition”. Inmany cases the operator wants to have manual control for the DSK-Transition.Since there is no dedicated Fader-Bar to accomplish this, there is no chance toachieve that goal on a DD5 or DD10 panel. But on the DD20 or DD30 panel thesituation is different.Here you have an ”EXTRA”-Fader that could be programmed to do that task.

5.5.2 PROBLEM SOLUTION

The solution is: Program a Timeline that consists of two Keyframes:

Keyframe 1 with ”DSK = off” and

Keyframe 2 with ”DSK = on”.

5.5.3 SET UP THE TIMELINE

Before such a timeline is stored it is recommended that the to be allocated memoryspace is reduced as far as possible and no other settings than Transition com-mands will get stored.

NOTE: If, for instance, a complete ME-setup will be stored, then running such

a timeline will overwrite the manually set PP-Crosspoints according to those that were selected during programming! If the DSK-Keyer parameters should remain the same all the time (i.e. always the same Station.Logo has to be cut in) then the appropriate DEFINE MEMO area (DSK+MASKi) has to be included when editing/storing a Timeline!

Select ”PP” in the DEFINE MEMO / RELOCATION area near the EXTRA numberblock on the panel.

Adjust the Keyer Parameters to your needs.

Step to the \ EXTRA \ DEFINE MEMO Display menu and select the ”TRANSI” field

in the upcoming configuration table. Use the arrow softbuttons to place the cursoron the appropriate field and then push ”TOGGLE” to activate/deactivate it (activa-ted = high-lighted). This will allow to store the TRANSITION parameters only.

If you also need to store the current settings of Keyer parameters then select theappropriate ”DSK+MASK1” or ”DSK+MASK2” sections additionally (see NOTEabove).




367

Program the Timeline:

The fastest approach will be to do this via EXTRA-Number block

– Push ”Edit” in Number block, type in two ”Digits” for a free Register space and hit ”Enter”.

– Push ”Store”.

NOTE: This stores the 1st Keyframe with DSKs being ” off ” .

– ”Cut” the needed DSK ”on” in the DSK module.

– Push ”Store” again.

NOTE: This stores the 2nd Keyframe with DSKs keyed ” on ” .

– Push ”Edit” again to invoke interpolation calculation and complete the programing.

5.5.4 RUN THE DSK-TIMELINE

Prepare and use the ”EXTRA-DSK” Fader

– Type the ”two digit” Timeline number in the Number block and hit ”Enter”.

– Select ”FlipFlop” control button in order to alternately key-in and -out the programmed DSK.

– Select ”STATUS” Display menu and activate the ”FADER- EXTRA” ( – > highlighted).

NOTE: Whenever the EXTRA Fader (or another one) shows no response,look at this point first and make sure that the appropriate fader is activated. In turn, whenever you don ’ t need the EXTRA Fader, turn it off to avoid confusion when starting to run a currently selected timeline by touching the fader unintendedly.

– Now you can run the DSK-Transition manually.

– or –

– Use the ”Cut” and ”Auto” buttons in the EXTRA section.

Of course the Auto-Trans-Time must then be preadjusted in the EXTRA sectionas well.




358

5.6 USE OF MASKING

5.6.1 APPLICATIONS

If Chromakeying (e. g. in front of a blue wall) should be omitted on foreground por-tions that include blue objects as well, there will be a need to hide these parts fromKey processing.

Another application could be to wipe in/out characters from a Character Generatorwith a pattern that can not be created with the internal Pattern Generator (e. g.PaintModeMasking).

A further application would be to exclude a certain number of foreground objectsthat come from a playback tape (together with its Key signals). In case of ”Remat-ting” already processed and tape recorded desaturated Chromakey scenes ontoa new backgrond there might be the need to ”rub out” part of the Key signal.

It is also possible that a user thinks of Keying with a signal that is created by the

Mask Generator only and to fill this shape with a DD-internal Matte Generator.

As you know best, there is plenty of applications where you have to use MaskGenerators. This Application Note will show what you can do with the built in masksand how easy it can be done. It also gives some hints to avoid hardware relateddifficulties that could occur in specific operational modes.

5.6.2 OPERATION

NOTE: PaintModeMasking Operations are not possible with DD5 Hardware.

In principal it is only possible to mask signals that use the following Key-Types:

– ADD – Key

– LIN – Key

– LUM – Key

– CHROMAKEY (both types)

Of course the Mask Key can not be used to mask itself !

The Mask can be a PATTERN, a BOX-MASK, or the output of a MASK-STORE,whatever signal this is fed with.

In some cases it is possible that you can achieve a specific operation in differentways, e. g. with pushbutton strokes in different panel sections.

NOTE: Using module pushbutton strokes is the fastest way of working, but using the better structured menues is more convenient for functions that aren ’ t used too often.




359

5.6.3 GENERAL SETUP

SET UP A BACKGROUNDand do not use the Transition module any further when you apply the followingoperations.

SELECT A KEYER

(e. g. KEY 1 ) in the ME you wish and adjust it.

NOTE: In this example KEY 1 is chosen, but the actions will also be valid for KEY 2, DSK 1 or DSK 2 in the corresponding ME.

– Select the KEY TYPE

– Set FILL and SOURCE to ”Key Bus”.

– ”Cut” the Key onto the background.

NOTE: If it is desired to paint something on screen adjust the Fill-Color in the autodelegated MATTES section after having pushed the ” Matte ” button in the KEYERS-Key-Fill section.

5.6.4 MASK OPERATIONS BY USE OF DISPLAY MENUES

With DD5/10’s connected VGE/(EGA) monitor the display of MASKS and STORESmenues automatically comes up on screen (autodelegation) when the xyzStore orMask buttons have been pushed in the appropriate modules.The reason for this is:There is no STORES or MASKS menu selection button in the INSTALLATIONmenu.

SET UP A MASK WITH MASK PVW

For autodelegated Mask settings do the following:

– Once again select the Keyer that has to be masked. For instance, in the[Masks-Display menu] – > push the KEY 1 button in the top row above ME1, ME2

and PP.

– Switch MASK PVW ”on” with the lower right PVW softbutton.

– Select the MASK SOURCE from up to 5 choices. Those are:

PATT1PATT2 ...not in DD5 !

STORE

BOX

BUS

NOTE: If you use a PATTERN make sure that this is not the one that will beused to wipe in/out the current Key signal. If you do not consider this,the result might be confusing when simultaneously using one generator for two purposes.

Another limitation is that you can only use those two pattern generators that are related to that ME where you create the mask.




360

[MASKS-Display menu] Per ME only one b/w video signal can be selected asmask signal. Hold down the ”BUS” softbutton while an input signal is selected fromthe AUX bar.

CLIP and GAIN for this mask bus are adjustable with the TOP (= Gain) and BOT-TOM (=Clip) knobs of the MASKS-Box-Modifiers.

This is to create rectangular mask shapes.Please refer to the Operations Manual (DD5/10 – >section 2.10 or DD20/30 – > sec-tion 2.11) for further information.

The masks that are generated with patterns can only have the shapes a WipeGenerator can produce with its modifiers.

If customized masks are needed they can be created with the help of the MASKSTORE. Therefore select the MASK SOURCE to be the Mask store.

[MASKS-Display menu] – > push MaskStore softbutton (lower center area).This activates the MaskStore output to be the source for the Keyer mask. Now thestore feeds the mask but it still has to be determined which source signal has to befed to the MaskStore.For the following example PATTERN 1 is used as a brush to paint a customizedmask. Hence, this becomes the STORE SOURCE.

– Set up the MaskStore

– Push the Stores Menu selection button

– [STORES-Display menu] – > In the menu push the Mask button.

NOTE: With more MEs (DD20/30) you have to verify that the autodelegation had put you into the correct ME.

If you must change:

– Select the destination ME by stepping through with either repeatedly pushingon ”ME” or ”MASK”.

– Select PATT 1 (or PATT 2)

PAINT A MASK (not possible with DD5 !)

[STORES-Display menu] – > Switch PaintMode ”ON”.

This activates a ”paint cursor” in addition to the mask that is already previewed. Atthe same time the MaskStore immediately freezes.

[STORES-Display menu] – > Push Clear to erase all contents

– Move the cursor to the place you want your object and hit Paint.

For CONTINUOUS DRAWING leave Paint active and movethe cursor, when finished, deactivate Paint.

NOTE: All mask placements will be recorded as long as Paint is active. Field- Flicker can occur when the paint brush is moved too fast. To over- come that problem switch to Field mode and by stepping through

select either Field A or Field B to be displayed twice instead of a Frame mode. Of course this results in half a vertical resolution.

MaskBus

Box

Pattn 1/2

Store




361

To DROP A SHAPE immediately turn off the currently highlighted Paint button.

NOTE: Only move the cursor when Paint is off and then push Paint to activate and immediately deactivate it to drop in a new object.This will then added the actual cursor to the current mask store con-

tents.

To RUBOUT specific MaskStore portions adjust your cursor and act in an appro-priate manner to what you’ve done with Paint.With RUB being ”on” (highlighted) while drawing it is possible to continously eraseportions, while RUB ”on/off” with no intermittent cursor movement only cuts a hole to the current mask.

SHIFT A MASK

[STORES-Display menu] – > Switch SHIFT ”on” (highlighted).

– Move the whole mask with the autodelegated Trackball and finishshifting with

[STORES-Display menu] – > Switch SHIFT ”off” (lowlighted).

– Continue to paint or erase certain mask portions if neccessary.

Application: Imagine that an Operator created a very sophisticated mask that was perfectlyadapted to a camera foreground to be used for Chromakey.Right before the liveevent someone bumps the camera and the mask needs to be shifted. No problem

– Your DD can perform MaskShifting.Furthermore it is possible to resume paintingor rubout actions on that shifted mask !To only perform a shift instead of re-drawinga complete new mask will not only save quite a lot of time, it can be accomplishedimmediately.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

The re-transfer of a shifted mask that is needed for continued painting or repeated shifting takes a little while (9 Fields). Under regular circumstances a user doesn ’ t recognize a drawback. But when using MaskShift operations (or Clear as well !)within programmed Timelines , it is strongly recommended to provide extra Keyf- rames for only switching off the Shift mode or for Clear operations, without any

other action. These additional Keyframes have to be put on HOLD for at least 5 Frames!

ACTIVATE THE MASK IN THE DESTINATED ME

When all mask related settings have been finished in PVW mode the time maycome when the dedicated Keyer has to be masked with it.

– Push the Mask on button in the appropriate KEYERS module.Otherwise the mask would have no effect on your keyed ME-Output.




362

5.6.5 MASK OPERATIONS WITH BUTTONS IN PANEL MODULES

SET UP A MASK WITH MASK PVW

For autodelegated Mask settings do the following:

– Once again select the Keyer that has to be masked. In the[KEYERS module] – > push the KEY 1 button.

– or –

[MASKS module] – > push the corresponding ME1/ME2/DSK

”Prim” or ”Sec” button (DD30 panel only).

– Switch MASK PVW ”on”. In the

[MASKS-Display menu] – > use the MASK PVW softbutton – or – in the

[MASKS module] –> select Mask PVW button

(not on DD20 panel).

– Select the MASK SOURCE from up to 5 choices. Those are:

Pattn1 (= Prim Wipe),

Pattn2 (= Sec Wipe), (not in DD5!)

Store (= MaskStore),

Box (= Box),

.... . (= MaskBus), (with Display or on DD30 panel only).

NOTE: If you use a PATTERN make sure that this is not the one that will be

used to wipe in/out the current Key signal. If you do not consider this,the result might be confusing when simultaneously using one generator for two purposes. Another limitation is that you can only use those two pattern generators that are related to that ME where you create the mask.

[MASKS-Display menu] Per ME only one b/w video signal can be selected asmask signal. Hold down the ”BUS” softbutton while an input signal is selected fromthe AUX bar.CLIP and GAIN for this mask bus are adjustable with the TOP (= Gain) and BOT-TOM (=Clip) knobs of the MASKS-Box-Modifiers.

This is to create rectangular mask shapes.

Please refer to the Operations Manual (DD5/10->2.10 or DD20/30 – >2.11) for furt-her information.

The masks that are generated with patterns can only have the shapes a WipeGenerator can produce with its modifiers.

If customized masks are needed they can be created with the help of the MASKSTORE. Therefore select the MASK SOURCE to be the mask store.

MaskBus

Box

Pattn 1/2




363

[MASKS module] – > push MaskStore (Store) button

– or –

[MASKS-Display menu] – > push MaskStore softbutton (lower center area).

This activates the MaskStore output to be the source for the Keyer mask. Now thestore feeds the mask but it still has to be determined which source signal has to befed to the MaskStore.For the following example PATTERN 1 is used as a brush to paint a customizedmask. Hence, this becomes the STORE SOURCE.

– Set up the MaskStore in the [STORES module]

(on a DD20 panel you can only refer to the STORES-Display-Menu !)

– Push the MaskStore button.

NOTE: With more MEs (DD20/30) you have to verify that the autodelegation had put you into the correct ME.

If you must change:

– Select an appropriate ME button.

NOTE: Panel has markings with different colors.

– Select Pattn 1 or Pattn 2 directly (DD30)

– or –

Hold down Pattn (DD5/10) while at the same time

selecting Wipe, Wipe 1 or Wipe 2 respectively.

PAINT A MASK (not possible with DD5 !)

[STORES module] – > Switch PaintMode ”on”.

This activates a ”paint cursor” in addition to the mask that is already previewed. Atthe same time the MaskStore immediately goes to a freeze state.

[STORES module] – > Push Clear to erase all contents

– Move the cursor to the place you want your object and hit Paint.

For CONTINUOUS DRAWING leave Paint active and move the cursor, when finis-hed, deactivate Paint.

NOTE: All mask placements will be recorded as long as Paint is active. Field- Flicker can occur when the paint brush is moved too fast. To over- come that problem switch to Field mode and by stepping through select either Field A or Field B to be displayed twice instead of a Frame mode. Of course this results in half a vertical resolution.

To DROP A SHAPE immediately turn off the current Paint button.

NOTE: Only move the cursor when Paint is off and then push Paint to activate and immediately deactivate it to drop in a new object. This will then

added the actual cursor to the current mask store contents.

Store




364

To RUBOUT specific MaskStore portions adjust your cursor and actin an appro-priate manner to what you’ve done with Paint. With Rub being ”on” while drawingit is possible to continously erase portions, while Rub ”on/off” with no intermittentcursor movement only cuts a hole to the current mask.

SHIFT A MASK

[STORES module] – > Switch MaskShift (Shift)”on”.

– Move the whole mask with the autodelegated Trackball and finish shifting with

[STORES module] – > Switch MaskShift (Shift)”off”.

– Continue to paint or erase certain mask portions if neccessary.

Application: Imagine that an Operator created a very sophisticated mask that was perfectlyadapted to a camera foreground to be used for Chromakey.Right before the live event someone bumps the camera and the mask needs to beshifted. No problem – your DD can perform MaskShifting.Furthermore it is possible to resume painting or rubout actions on that shifted mask!

To only perform a shift instead of re-drawing a complete new mask will not only savequite a lot of time, it can be accomplished immediately.

IMPORTANT NOTE: The re-transfer of a shifted mask that is needed for continued painting or repeated shifting takes a little while (9 Fields). Under regular circumstances a user doesn ’ t recognize a drawback. But when using MaskShift operations (or Clear as well !)within programmed Timelines , it is strongly recommended to provide extra Keyf- rames for only switching off the Shift mode or for Clear operations, without any other action. These additional Keyframes have to be put on HOLD for at least 5 Frames !

ACTIVATE THE MASK IN THE DESTINATED ME

When all mask related settings have been finished in PVW mode the time maycome when the dedicated Keyer has to be masked with it.

– Push the Mask on button in the appropriate KEYERS module.

Otherwise the mask would have no effect on your keyed ME-Output.




365



6. Index Diamond digital DD20 / DD30

366

Access, 123, 127

Access Menu, 127

Add, 41

Add Key, 27

Adjusting the Color, 63

ALD, 205

Alphabetical keypad, 67

analogue values, 118

Angle, 63

Aspect, 68, 72

Assign, 302

Asynchronous sources, 9

Auto, 22, 38, 59

Auto Chroma Key, 38

Auto Delegation, 114

Auto key, 32, 56

Auto Load, 205

AUTO MENU, 147

Auto Menu, 43, 147

Auto Play, 299

Automatic key adjustment, 32

Aux Buses, 11

Aux Buses panel, 4, 5

Aux coupled, 107

AUX delegation, 170

AUX panels, 170

Aux Panels, 170

Background, 8

background transition stage, 17

background brightness, 145

Background bus, 8

Background Preset, 8

backup copies, 201

Backup files, 205

Bank, 101, 102

Bank Mode, 263

BG/PST Germ, 106

BGD Matte, 62

Bias, 343

Black, 106

Black preset, 21

Bord, 34, 68, 71

Box, 90

Box Mask, 214

Bus Correction, 229

Bus Correction menu, 229

Chr Key, 28, 36

Chroma, 40, 50

Chroma Key, 28

Chroma key adjust, 50

Chroma Key panel, 4, 5

Chroma Keyers, 36

Clean up, 39

Cleanup / Density, 46

Clear, 223

Clip / Gain, 47

Clip Clean up, 31

COL C, 51

Col Limiter, 64

color triangle limitation, 64

Comp, 68

Config, 129

Config panel, 144

Continuity, 344

Copying, 201, 203

Copying Key, 33

Copying mattes, 64

Copying wipe settings, 72

Couple, 139, 142

Couple submenu, 142

Couple/Split, 30

CP-300, 170

CP-330, 170




367

Creating a box mask, 90

Crop, 53

Cursor, 38, 93, 116

Cut, 22, 26, 59

Cut key, 56

Cut Right, 106

Define Memo, 260

Delegation diagrams, 114

Delegation, 2nd, 9

Delete, 199, 301

delete, 200

Delete Disk, 199

Deleting, 199

Density, 39

Device level, 192

Device name, 192

Device type, 192

Diagnosis, 164diagnostics submenu, 164

Directory Structure, 187

Disk drive, 4, 5

Disk menu, 185

Dissolve, 256

Dissolve Time, 256

Downstream Keyers, 55

Drop, 34

DSK Drop, 105

DSK panel, 4

DVE, 11, 13 – bus, 11 – devices, 14 – effects, 14, 19 – integration, 13 – transition, 13

DVE Connection, 108

DynaChrome, 17

Dynachrome, 53

E – Box Port Protokol, 107

Edit, 101, 102, 256, 295

EditEnbl, 100Editing, 256

Effect selection, 15

Error Messages, 347

error messages, 206

Expon, 125

Extend Pos, 68

Extern Aux, 178

external crossbars, 178

EXTRA, 101, 123, 255EXTRA Editor, 309

EXTRA menu, 255

EXTRA panel, 4, 257

Extra Panel, 257

EXTRA-panel, 5

Fade-To-Black, 59

Fade-to-Black panel, 4

Fader, 22

Fader Adjust, 169

Fader Play, 299

Faders, 126

Fade-to-Black-panel, 5

FGD Fade, 28, 37

Field, 96

Field Domin, 106

File / directory level, 193

File Menu, 185, 187

Flash software, 351

flat, 63

Flip flop, 67

floppy disk, 187

Forc FGND, 92

Foreground Fade, 28

Forground Fade, 52

FractalTextures, 61




368

Frame Mode, 220

Freeze, 68, 96, 221

FTB, 59

function key, 99FX Loop, 14, 15

Gain/Size Density, 31

Gamma, 125

Genlock adjustment, 161

Genlock phase, 109

genlock phase, 161

GPI, 174

GPI Enbl, 100

GPI input, 225

GPI inputs, 225

GPI output, 227

GPI outputs, 225

GPI Submenu, 174

GPI-AC, 123

GPI-AC menu, 225

Hard key, 26

hold time, 272

HUE, 50

Hue, 40

Ident Input menu, 139

Input Correction, 231

Input Correction Menu, 231

inputs, 7

Install, 137

Installation Menu, 137

Key – Buses, 9 – Fill, 30

– Over, 32 – PVW, 33 – Sources, 30

Key border, 34

Key Bus, 30

Key Bus (Fill), 30

Key Color, 40

Key Coupled, 107

Key inversion, 33

Key masking, 32

Key Memory, 107

Key modes, 27

Key on, 26

Key preview, 32

Keyer delegation, 26

Keyer ME1 panel, 4, 5

Keyer ME2 panel, 4

Keyer PP panel, 4, 5

Keyer priority, 18, 32Keyers, 25

Keyframe, 256

keyframe, 275

Layer Mode, 124

Limit on, 23

Limit set, 23

Lin Key, 28

Linear, 125, 274, 339

Linear key, 17, 32

Load foreign device, 352

Load my panel, 352

Lock Panel, 135

Login of a user, 131

Loop, 13

loop, 277

Low – Light, 106




PGM/PST German, 147

phase relation, 161

Pixel manipulator, 240

Play, 256, 295

Port, 148

port protocols, 160

Port – Protokol, 107

Pos, 68

Position, 34, 63

Positioner, 4, 5, 93

Positioning, 45

PP-Review, 104

Preset bus, 8

preview mixing levels, 17

primary keys, 7

Recall, 186, 256, 283

Record, 256, 295

Register, 256

Register Mode, 256

Rename, 196, 303

Renaming, 196

reset, 200

RGB color triangle, 64

RGB limitation, 64

RGB values, 64

rotation wipes, 66

Rub, 223

Running light in Keys, 116

S-Curv, 274, 339

S-Exp, 125

Select %-Bars, 147

Select E – Box, 104

Select MC, 104

Selecting A Register, 263

Selectivity, 50 – L, 39 – R, 39

Selectivity C, 39

Selectivity L, 38

Selectivity R, 38

Selectivity Y, 38

Self Key, 30

Selfload, 351

Service, 163Set up, 101

Shadow, 34

Shdw Store, 34

Show E-Box, 128

Show Memo, 308

Size, 72

Sizing, 45

Smooth, 274, 339

Snap, 256Snapshot, 256

Soft, 68, 72

Softening, 45

Softkey, 115

softkey, 99

Softness, 63

Source Selection, 7

Source Selection Key, 288

Source Selection panel, 4

Source selection panel, 5

Spec wash, 63

Split Key, 30

Status, 121

dd20-30 operating instructions.pdf

Documents